Docstoc

Oracle Applications R12 Vol 1

Document Sample
Oracle Applications R12 Vol 1 Powered By Docstoc
					                            R12 Oracle: Install, Patch,
                            and Maintain Oracle
                            Applications
                                                           m y
                                                         de
                            Student Guide - Volume 1




                                                     c a
                                                   A
                                   le
                              r ac
                             O ly
                          l & On
                        na se
                      er U
 D49656GC10
 Edition 1.0
 August 2007
 D51993
                 I nt
          c le
O ra
 Copyright © 2007, Oracle. All rights reserved

 This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. You may copy and
 print this document solely for your own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be modified or altered in any way.
 Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright law, you may not use, share, download, upload, copy, print, display,
 perform, reproduce, publish, license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in whole or in part without the express authorization
 of Oracle.

 The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the document, please
 report them in writing to: Oracle University, 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This document is not
 warranted to be error-free.

 If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using the documentation on behalf of the United
 States Government, the following notice is applicable:

 U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
 The U.S. Government’s rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display, or disclose these training materials are restricted
 by the terms of the applicable Oracle license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract.

 Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Siebel are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other names may
 be trademarks of their respective owners.


 Author

 Robert Farrington

 Technical Contributors and Reviewers

 Max Arderius, Leta Davis, Clara Jaeckel, Satish Janarthanan, Ruth Mamo, Nisha Nair, Bill
 Sawyer, Yun Shaw, Mildred Wang

                                                       oracletutor                                                             m y
                                                                                                                 de
 This book was published using:



                                                                                                      c        a
                                                                                                    A
                                             le
                                        r ac
                                       O ly
                                    l & On
                                  na se
                             nt er U
                           I
            c le
O ra
                                                               Table of Contents

 Oracle Applications Overview........................................................................................................................1-1
   Oracle Applications Overview ......................................................................................................................1-3
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................1-4
   Oracle E-Business Suite ................................................................................................................................1-5
   Oracle E-Business Suite Home Page .............................................................................................................1-6
   HTML Interface.............................................................................................................................................1-7
   Forms Interface..............................................................................................................................................1-9
   Concurrent Processing...................................................................................................................................1-11
   System Overview...........................................................................................................................................1-12
   Oracle Applications .......................................................................................................................................1-13
   Applications Technology Stack for Release 12 .............................................................................................1-14
   Rapid Install...................................................................................................................................................1-15
   Rapid Install Technology Stack Components................................................................................................1-16
   Product Families ............................................................................................................................................1-17
   Example Standard Product Identifiers ...........................................................................................................1-18
   Product Registration ......................................................................................................................................1-19
   Product Dependencies ...................................................................................................................................1-20
   Vision Demo Database ..................................................................................................................................1-21
   Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................1-22
 Preparing for Your Installation .....................................................................................................................2-1
   Preparing For Your Installation .....................................................................................................................2-3

                                                                                                                                                                    y
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................2-4
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................2-5

                                                                                                                                                                  m
   Rapid Install...................................................................................................................................................2-6


                                                                                                                                                de
   Technology Stack Components .....................................................................................................................2-8
   Release 12 Applications Technology Stack – Key Changes ........................................................................2-11

                                                                                                                                              a
   Release 12 Platforms .....................................................................................................................................2-12

                                                                                                                                  c
   Software Requirements..................................................................................................................................2-13

                                                                                                                                A
   CPU Requirements ........................................................................................................................................2-15
   Memory Requirements ..................................................................................................................................2-16

                                                    le
   Disk Space Requirements ..............................................................................................................................2-17



                                                 ac
   Disk Space Requirements (cont.) ..................................................................................................................2-18
   Before Starting Rapid Install .........................................................................................................................2-20

                                               r
   Create Operating System Accounts (UNIX)..................................................................................................2-21
   Create Operating System Accounts (Windows) ............................................................................................2-23

                                              O ly
   Set Up Stage Directory ..................................................................................................................................2-24



                                           l & On
   Set Up Stage Directory (cont.).......................................................................................................................2-27
   Set Up Stage Directory ..................................................................................................................................2-28
   Start Rapid Install from the Stage Area .........................................................................................................2-30


                                         na se
   Run Rapid Install from the Disks ..................................................................................................................2-31



                                       er U
   Using an Alias for the Host Machine.............................................................................................................2-32
   How an Installation Works ............................................................................................................................2-33


                                    nt
   Using the Rapid Install Wizard......................................................................................................................2-34
   Choosing an Installation Environment ..........................................................................................................2-35

                                  I
   Registering Products and Country-Specific Functionalities .........................................................................2-37


                 le
   Selecting NLS Settings..................................................................................................................................2-38
   Selecting Configuration Parameters ..............................................................................................................2-40

               c
   Validating Configuration Parameters ............................................................................................................2-41


  ra
   Running Rapid Install....................................................................................................................................2-42
   Restarting the Installation ..............................................................................................................................2-43

O  Configuration File..........................................................................................................................................2-44
   Rapid Install Log Files ..................................................................................................................................2-45

                                                      Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                            i
    Rapid Install Help..........................................................................................................................................2-46
    Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................2-47
    Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................2-48
    Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................2-49
      Practice - Performing Preliminary Installation Tasks ................................................................................2-50
      Solution - Performing Preliminary Installation Tasks ...............................................................................2-51
 Performing an Installation..............................................................................................................................3-1
   Performing an Installation .............................................................................................................................3-3
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................3-4
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................3-5
   Basic Installation Procedure ..........................................................................................................................3-7
   Simplest Installation ......................................................................................................................................3-8
   More Typical Installation ..............................................................................................................................3-9
   Standard Installation Steps ............................................................................................................................3-10
   Step 1 Start the Rapid Install Wizard.............................................................................................................3-13
   Step 2 Select a Wizard Operation ..................................................................................................................3-14
   Step 3 Oracle Configuration Manager ...........................................................................................................3-16
   Step 4 Configuration Choice .........................................................................................................................3-18
   Step 5 Global System Settings.......................................................................................................................3-19
   Step 5: Global System Settings......................................................................................................................3-20
   Step 6 Database Node Configuration.............................................................................................................3-21
   Step 7 Database Directory .............................................................................................................................3-24
   Step 8 Select Licensing Type ........................................................................................................................3-25
   Step 9 License Additional Products...............................................................................................................3-26
   Step 10 License Products...............................................................................................................................3-27
   Step 11 Select Country-Specific Functionality..............................................................................................3-28
   Step 12 Select Internationalization Settings ..................................................................................................3-30
   Step 13 Primary Applications Node Configuration (UNIX)..........................................................................3-32
                                                                                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                                                                                de
   Step 13 Primary Applications Node Configuration (Windows) ....................................................................3-33
   Step 14 Primary Applications Node Services...............................................................................................3-34

                                                                                                                                              a
   Step 15 Primary Applications Node Directories...........................................................................................3-38

                                                                                                                                  c
   Step 16 Review Node Information ................................................................................................................3-39
   Step 17 Additional Applications Node ..........................................................................................................3-40

                                                                                                                                A
   Step 18 Shared Applications Node ................................................................................................................3-41


                                                    le
   Step 19 Review Additional Applications Nodes ..........................................................................................3-42
   Step 20 Review Pre-Install Tests ...................................................................................................................3-43


                                                 ac
   Step 21 Review Setup Portion .......................................................................................................................3-47


                                               r
   Step 22 Start the Installation..........................................................................................................................3-48
   Step 23 Monitor Status Indicators and Prompts ............................................................................................3-49

                                              O ly
   Restart the Installation (only if required).......................................................................................................3-50
   Step 24 Review Post-Installation Tests .........................................................................................................3-51


                                           l & On
   Step 25 Review Components Installed ..........................................................................................................3-52
   Express Installation........................................................................................................................................3-53


                                         na se
   Step 1 Start Rapid Install Wizard ..................................................................................................................3-55
   Step 2 Select Express installation ..................................................................................................................3-56


                                       er U
   Step 3 Oracle Configuration Manager ...........................................................................................................3-57



                                    nt
   Step 4 Configuration Choices........................................................................................................................3-59
   Step 5 Review Pre-Install Tests.....................................................................................................................3-60

                                  I
   Correct Any Problems ...................................................................................................................................3-61
   Step 6 Perform the Installation ......................................................................................................................3-62

                 le
   Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................3-63

               c
   Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................3-64


  ra
   Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................3-65
     Practice - Performing a Standard Installation ............................................................................................3-66
     Solution - Performing a Standard Installation............................................................................................3-68

O    Practice - Additional Installation Runs ......................................................................................................3-71

                                                      Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                            ii
        Solution - Additional Installation Runs .....................................................................................................3-72
 Finishing Your Installation.............................................................................................................................4-1
   Finishing Your Installation ............................................................................................................................4-3
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................4-4
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................4-5
   Required Post-installation Steps ....................................................................................................................4-6
   Log In to Oracle Applications .......................................................................................................................4-7
   E-Business Suite Home Page.........................................................................................................................4-8
   Change Default Passwords ............................................................................................................................4-9
   Configure Database Initialization Parameters ...............................................................................................4-10
   Review Security Practices .............................................................................................................................4-11
   Update PL/SQL Log and Out Directory ........................................................................................................4-12
   Implement Product and Country-Specific Functionality ...............................................................................4-13
   Configure Client Software.............................................................................................................................4-14
   Conditional Tasks Specific to Your Installation............................................................................................4-15
   Set Up Printers...............................................................................................................................................4-17
   Set Up Printers - Windows ............................................................................................................................4-18
   Resize Your Database....................................................................................................................................4-19
   Set Up National Language Support (NLS) ....................................................................................................4-20
   Set Up Unicode Character Sets......................................................................................................................4-21
   Complete Oracle Workflow Notification Mailer Configuration....................................................................4-22
   Set Up and Implement Oracle Embedded Data Warehouse (EDW)..............................................................4-24
   Set Up and Implement Discoverer End User Layer (EUL) ...........................................................................4-25
   Set Up Demand Planning ..............................................................................................................................4-26
   Convert to a Public Sector, Education, or Not-for Profit System ..................................................................4-27
   Implement Multiple Organizations................................................................................................................4-28
   Back Up Oracle Applications ........................................................................................................................4-29
   Understand System Administration and Maintenance Tasks ........................................................................4-30
                                                                                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                                                                                de
   Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................4-31
   Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................4-32

                                                                                                                                              a
   Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................4-33
      Practice - Accessing Oracle Applications and Configuring the Client Software.......................................4-34
      Solution - Accessing Oracle Applications and Configuring the Client Software ......................................4-35
                                                                                                                                  c
                                                                                                                                A
 Oracle Applications Components...................................................................................................................5-1

                                                    le
   Oracle Applications Components ..................................................................................................................5-3



                                                 ac
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................5-4
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................5-5

                                               r
   Multi-Tier Architecture .................................................................................................................................5-6


                                              O ly
   Desktop Tier: Traditional Forms Interface ....................................................................................................5-7
   Desktop Tier: Forms Client Applet ...............................................................................................................5-8



                                           l & On
   Desktop Tier: Java Client ..............................................................................................................................5-9
   Application Tier.............................................................................................................................................5-10



                                         na se
   Application Tier: Load Balancing .................................................................................................................5-11
   Application Tier: HTML-Based Applications ...............................................................................................5-12



                                       er U
   Application Tier: Oracle Applications Framework .......................................................................................5-13
   Application Tier: Oracle Applications Framework Components ..................................................................5-14


                                    nt
   Application Tier: Oracle Applications Framework Processing .....................................................................5-15
   Application Tier: Java Servlet Access with HTML Applications .................................................................5-16

                                  I
   Application Tier: Forms Services ..................................................................................................................5-17


                 le
   Application Tier: Forms Services Architecture .............................................................................................5-18
   Application Tier: Network Traffic.................................................................................................................5-19

               c
   Application Tier: Concurrent Processing Server ...........................................................................................5-21



O ra
   Application Tier: Report Review Agent........................................................................................................5-22
   Application Tier: Accessing Concurrent Processing Output .........................................................................5-23
   Application Tier: Administration Server (Obsolete) .....................................................................................5-24
   Database Tier.................................................................................................................................................5-25

                                                      Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                           iii
    Oracle Homes ................................................................................................................................................5-26
    Oracle Applications Technology Layer.........................................................................................................5-28
    Oracle Applications DBA (AD) ....................................................................................................................5-29
    Oracle Application Object Library (FND).....................................................................................................5-30
    Oracle Application Object Library: End User Features.................................................................................5-31
    Oracle Application Object Library: Developer Features ...............................................................................5-32
    Oracle Application Object Library: System Administration Features ...........................................................5-33
    Oracle Application Object Library: Security Features ..................................................................................5-35
    Oracle Applications Utilities (AU) ................................................................................................................5-36
    Oracle Applications Framework (OAF) ........................................................................................................5-37
    Oracle Workflow (WF) .................................................................................................................................5-38
    Oracle Alert (ALR)........................................................................................................................................5-39
    Oracle XML Publisher (XDO) ......................................................................................................................5-40
    Oracle Applications Manager (OAM) ...........................................................................................................5-41
    Release 12 Applications Technology Stack – Key Changes ........................................................................5-42
    Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................5-43
    Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................5-44
 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages....................................................................................6-1
   Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages.....................................................................................6-3
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................6-4
   Topic Overview .............................................................................................................................................6-5
   Environment Files..........................................................................................................................................6-6
   Main Applications Environment File ............................................................................................................6-7
   Key Parameters in <CONTEXT_NAME>.env .............................................................................................6-8
   Temporary Files.............................................................................................................................................6-13
   The adovars.env File......................................................................................................................................6-14
   The adconfig.txt File......................................................................................................................................6-15
   The fndenv.env File.......................................................................................................................................6-16
                                                                                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                                                                  de
   The devenv.env File ......................................................................................................................................6-17
   Application Tier Server Control Scripts ........................................................................................................6-18

                                                                                                                                                a
   Modifying Environment Files........................................................................................................................6-23

                                                                                                                                   c
   Oracle Applications Languages .....................................................................................................................6-24
   Character Sets – Introduction ........................................................................................................................6-28

                                                                                                                                 A
   Character Sets – Database Tier......................................................................................................................6-29


                                                    le
   Character Sets – Application Tier..................................................................................................................6-31
   Character Sets – Desktop Tier .......................................................................................................................6-32


                                                 ac
   Globalizations and Country-specific Functionalities.....................................................................................6-33


                                               r
   Dates and Numbers........................................................................................................................................6-34
   National Language Support (NLS) ................................................................................................................6-35

                                              O ly
   NLS and Application Tier Servers.................................................................................................................6-36
   Translation Patches........................................................................................................................................6-37


                                           l & On
   Translated Language Items............................................................................................................................6-38
   Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................6-39


                                         na se
   Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................6-40
   Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................6-41


                                       er U
     Practice - Reviewing the Environment File ...............................................................................................6-42



                                    nt
     Solution - Reviewing the Environment File ..............................................................................................6-43
     Practice - Starting and Stopping Server Processes.....................................................................................6-44

                                  I
     Solution - Starting and Stopping Server Processes....................................................................................6-45


                 le
 Oracle Applications File System.....................................................................................................................7-1
   Oracle Applications File System ...................................................................................................................7-3

               c
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................7-4



O ra
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................7-5
   INST_TOP Directory ....................................................................................................................................7-7
   Database Tier File System .............................................................................................................................7-8
   Application Tier File System.........................................................................................................................7-9

                                                      Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                           iv
    APPL_TOP Structure ....................................................................................................................................7-10
    Product Directories ........................................................................................................................................7-11
    Globalization Products ..................................................................................................................................7-12
    Applications Context File ..............................................................................................................................7-13
    Applications Product Directories...................................................................................................................7-14
    Additional Language Subdirectories .............................................................................................................7-28
    $APPL_TOP/admin Directory.......................................................................................................................7-29
    $APPL_TOP/admin Directory Text Files......................................................................................................7-30
    AD Directory .................................................................................................................................................7-31
    AU Directory .................................................................................................................................................7-32
    Common Components Directory...................................................................................................................7-33
    Java Files .......................................................................................................................................................7-34
    Applications Technology Stack Directory.....................................................................................................7-35
    Database Directories......................................................................................................................................7-36
    Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................7-37
    Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................7-38
    Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................7-39
      Practice - Navigating the File System........................................................................................................7-40
      Solution - Navigating the File System .......................................................................................................7-41
      Practice - Locating and Examining the Applications Context File............................................................7-42
      Solution - Locating and Examining the Applications Context File ...........................................................7-43
 Oracle Applications Database ........................................................................................................................8-1
   Oracle Applications Database........................................................................................................................8-3
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................8-4
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................8-5
   Oracle Applications Database Objects ..........................................................................................................8-6
   Multiple Languages in the Database..............................................................................................................8-7

                                                                                                                                                                     m
   Schemas.........................................................................................................................................................8-8
                                                                                                                                                                       y
                                                                                                                                                   de
   Example Oracle Applications Product Schemas............................................................................................8-9
   APPS Schema ................................................................................................................................................8-10

                                                                                                                                                 a
   Additional Schemas.......................................................................................................................................8-11

                                                                                                                                    c
   Schemas Used During Signon .......................................................................................................................8-12
   Implementing Multiple Organizations...........................................................................................................8-13

                                                                                                                                  A
   Reporting Currencies.....................................................................................................................................8-14


                                                    le
   Database Features ..........................................................................................................................................8-15
   Monitoring Features – Automatic Workload Repository ..............................................................................8-17


                                                 ac
   Monitoring Features – Automatic Database Diagnostic Monitor ..................................................................8-18


                                               r
   Monitoring Features – Active Session History..............................................................................................8-19
   Performance Features – Query Optimization ................................................................................................8-20

                                              O ly
   Performance Features – Database Resource Manager...................................................................................8-21
   Performance Features – Partitioned Tables ...................................................................................................8-22


                                           l & On
   Performance Features – Temporary Tables ...................................................................................................8-23
   Performance Features – Locally Managed Tablespaces ................................................................................8-24


                                         na se
   Performance Features – Oracle Applications Tablespace Model ..................................................................8-25
   Scalability Features – Oracle Real Application Clusters ...............................................................................8-26


                                       er U
   Business Intelligence Features – Materialized Views....................................................................................8-28



                                    nt
   Database Tier Server Process Scripts ............................................................................................................8-29
   Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................8-32

                                  I
   Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................8-33
   Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................8-34

                 le
     Practice - Starting and Stopping the Database ...........................................................................................8-35

               c
     Solution - Starting and Stopping the Database ..........................................................................................8-36




O ra
 Advanced Configuration Options...................................................................................................................9-1
   Advanced Configuration Options ..................................................................................................................9-3
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................9-4
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................9-5

                                                      Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                            v
    Shared Application Tier File System - Introduction......................................................................................9-6
    Shared Application Tier File System – Not In Use .......................................................................................9-7
    Shared Application Tier File System – In Use ..............................................................................................9-8
    Shared Application Tier File System – Features ...........................................................................................9-9
    Shared Application Tier File System – Benefits............................................................................................9-10
    Shared Application Tier File System - Availability ......................................................................................9-11
    Load Balancing – Introduction ......................................................................................................................9-12
    Load Balancing – Strategic Effect .................................................................................................................9-13
    Load Balancing – Areas ................................................................................................................................9-14
    Load Balancing – Session Persistence...........................................................................................................9-15
    Load Balancing – SSL Accelerators..............................................................................................................9-16
    Load Balancing – Specific Options ...............................................................................................................9-17
    Load Balancing – DNS Layer........................................................................................................................9-18
    Load Balancing – HTTP Layer......................................................................................................................9-19
    Load Balancing – Concurrent Processing Layer ...........................................................................................9-20
    Load Balancing – Database Layer .................................................................................................................9-21
    Network Features – Introduction ...................................................................................................................9-22
    Network Features – Strategies .......................................................................................................................9-23
    Network Features – Latency..........................................................................................................................9-24
    Network Features – Satellite Links................................................................................................................9-25
    Network Features – Wireless LANs ..............................................................................................................9-26
    Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................9-28
    Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................9-29
 Use Oracle Applications AD Utilities .............................................................................................................10-1
   Use Oracle Applications AD Utilities ...........................................................................................................10-3

                                                                                                                                                                   y
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................10-4
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................10-5

                                                                                                                                                                 m
   AD Utilities ...................................................................................................................................................10-6


                                                                                                                                               de
   Configuration and Environment Files............................................................................................................10-8
   Setting the Environment ................................................................................................................................10-10

                                                                                                                                             a
   The AD Utilities ............................................................................................................................................10-12

                                                                                                                                 c
   The Web-based Utilities ................................................................................................................................10-15
   Running the AD Utilities ...............................................................................................................................10-17

                                                                                                                               A
   Command Line Arguments............................................................................................................................10-18


                                                    le
   Command Line Arguments - abandon...........................................................................................................10-20
   Command Line Arguments - defaultsfile ......................................................................................................10-21


                                                 ac
   Command Line Arguments - help .................................................................................................................10-22


                                               r
   Command Line Arguments - interactive .......................................................................................................10-23
   Command Line Arguments - localworkers....................................................................................................10-24

                                              O ly
   Command Line Arguments - logfile..............................................................................................................10-25
   Command Line Arguments - menu_option ...................................................................................................10-26


                                           l & On
   Command Line Arguments - parallel_index_threshold.................................................................................10-27
   Command Line Arguments - printdebug .......................................................................................................10-28


                                         na se
   Command Line Arguments - restart ..............................................................................................................10-29
   Command Line Arguments - wait_on_failed_job .........................................................................................10-30


                                       er U
   Command Line Arguments - workers ...........................................................................................................10-31



                                    nt
   Command Line Arguments - flags.................................................................................................................10-32
   AD Utilities Flags - hidepw...........................................................................................................................10-33

                                  I
   AD Utilities Flags - logging ..........................................................................................................................10-34
   AD Utilities Flags - trace...............................................................................................................................10-35

                 le
   AD Utilities Features .....................................................................................................................................10-36

               c
   AD Feature Versions .....................................................................................................................................10-37


  ra
   AD Prompts ...................................................................................................................................................10-39
   Parallel Processing.........................................................................................................................................10-40
   Parallel Processing - Managers......................................................................................................................10-41

O  Parallel Processing - Workers........................................................................................................................10-42

                                                     Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                           vi
    Parallel Processing - Deferred Jobs ...............................................................................................................10-43
    Database Processing Phases ..........................................................................................................................10-44
    Distributed AD – Introduction.......................................................................................................................10-46
    Distributed AD – Requirements ....................................................................................................................10-47
    Distributed AD – Usage ................................................................................................................................10-48
    Log Files........................................................................................................................................................10-49
    Worker Log Files...........................................................................................................................................10-50
    Restart Files ...................................................................................................................................................10-51
    Manager and Worker Log Messages .............................................................................................................10-52
    Maintenance Mode – Introduction.................................................................................................................10-55
    Maintenance Mode ........................................................................................................................................10-56
    Restricted Mode.............................................................................................................................................10-57
    Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................10-58
    Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................10-59
    Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................10-60
      Practice - Setting the Applications Environment and Locating the AD Utilities.......................................10-61
      Solution - Setting the Applications Environment and Locating the AD Utilities ......................................10-62
 AD Administration: Generate Applications Files Tasks ..............................................................................11-1
  Generate Applications Files Tasks ................................................................................................................11-3
  Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................11-4
  Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................11-5
  AD Administration ........................................................................................................................................11-6
  Preliminary Tasks ..........................................................................................................................................11-7
  AD Administration Prompts ..........................................................................................................................11-8
  AD Administration Log Files ........................................................................................................................11-9
  AD Administration Main Menu.....................................................................................................................11-12
  Generate Applications Files Menu ................................................................................................................11-13
  Generate Message Files .................................................................................................................................11-14
                                                                                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                                                                                 de
  Generate Form Files ......................................................................................................................................11-17
  Generate Report Files ....................................................................................................................................11-23

                                                                                                                                               a
  Generate Product JAR Files...........................................................................................................................11-26

                                                                                                                                   c
  Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................11-28
  Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................11-29

                                                                                                                                 A
  Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................11-30


                                                    le
    Practice - Starting AD Administration.......................................................................................................11-31
    Solution - Starting AD Administration ......................................................................................................11-32


                                                 ac
    Practice - Generating Forms Files .............................................................................................................11-34


                                               r
    Solution - Generating Forms Files.............................................................................................................11-35


                                              O ly
 AD Administration: Maintain Applications Files Tasks ..............................................................................12-1
  AD Administration: Maintain Applications Files Tasks...............................................................................12-3



                                           l & On
  Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................12-4
  Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................12-5



                                         na se
  Maintain Applications Files...........................................................................................................................12-6
  Relink Applications Programs.......................................................................................................................12-7



                                       er U
  Copy Files to Destinations.............................................................................................................................12-10
  Convert Character Set....................................................................................................................................12-12


                                    nt
  Maintain Snapshot Information .....................................................................................................................12-18
  Check for Missing Files.................................................................................................................................12-22

                                  I
  File System Tasks and Services.....................................................................................................................12-24


                 le
  Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................12-25
  Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................12-26

               c
  Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................12-27



O ra Practice - Relinking Applications Programs..............................................................................................12-28
     Solution - Relinking Applications Programs .............................................................................................12-29
     Practice - Copying Files to Destinations....................................................................................................12-30
     Solution - Copying Files to Destinations ...................................................................................................12-31

                                                      Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                           vii
        Practice - Maintaining Snapshot Information ............................................................................................12-32
        Solution - Maintaining Snapshot Information ...........................................................................................12-33
 AD Administration: Maintain Database Entities Tasks...............................................................................13-1
  AD Administration: Maintain Database Entities Tasks.................................................................................13-3
  Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................13-4
  Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................13-5
  Maintain Database Entities ............................................................................................................................13-6
  Validate APPS Schema .................................................................................................................................13-7
  Recreate Grants and Synonyms .....................................................................................................................13-10
  Maintain Multi-lingual Tables.......................................................................................................................13-13
  Check DUAL Table.......................................................................................................................................13-15
  Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................13-18
  Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................13-19
  Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................13-20
    Practice - Validating APPS schema...........................................................................................................13-21
    Solution - Validating APPS Schema .........................................................................................................13-22
 AD Administration: Compile/Reload Database Entities Tasks ...................................................................14-1
  AD Administration: Compile/Reload Database Entities Tasks ....................................................................14-3
  Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................14-4
  Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................14-5
  Compile/Reload Database Entities ................................................................................................................14-6
  Compile APPS Schema .................................................................................................................................14-7
  Compile Menu Information ...........................................................................................................................14-10
  Compile Flexfield Data in AOL Tables.........................................................................................................14-12
  Reload JAR Files to Database .......................................................................................................................14-15
  Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................14-17
  Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................14-18
  Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................14-19
                                                                                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                                                                                 de
    Practice - Compiling APPS schema...........................................................................................................14-20
    Solution - Compiling APPS Schema .........................................................................................................14-21

                                                                                                                                               a
    Practice - Compiling Flexfields .................................................................................................................14-22

                                                                                                                                   c
    Solution - Compiling Flexfields ................................................................................................................14-23
 AD Administration: Non-Interactive Operation and Maintenance Mode .................................................15-1
                                                                                                                                 A
                                                    le
  AD Administration: Non-Interactive Operation, and Maintenance Mode....................................................15-3
  Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................15-4


                                                 ac
  Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................15-5


                                               r
  Creating AD Administration Defaults File ...................................................................................................15-6
  Running AD Administration in Non-Interactive Mode ................................................................................15-7

                                              O ly
  Menu Options ................................................................................................................................................15-10
  Maintenance Mode - Introduction .................................................................................................................15-14


                                           l & On
  Accessing Maintenance Mode.......................................................................................................................15-15
  Changing Maintenance Mode........................................................................................................................15-16


                                         na se
  Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................15-17
  Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................15-18


                                       er U
  Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................15-19



                                    nt
    Practice - Running AD Administration in Non-Interactive Mode .............................................................15-20
    Solution - Running AD Administration in Non-Interactive Mode ............................................................15-21

                                  I
    Practice - Changing the Status of Maintenance Mode ...............................................................................15-22
    Solution - Changing the Status of Maintenance Mode ..............................................................................15-23

                 le
 Special Utilities.................................................................................................................................................16-1

               c
   Special Utilities .............................................................................................................................................16-3



O ra
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................16-4
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................16-5
   AD Controller................................................................................................................................................16-6
   Reviewing Worker Status ..............................................................................................................................16-8

                                                      Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                           viii
    Worker Status Flow .......................................................................................................................................16-10
    Resolving a Failed Worker ............................................................................................................................16-11
    Determining Why a Worker Failed ...............................................................................................................16-12
    Restarting a Failed Worker............................................................................................................................16-13
    Restarting a Failed Patch Process ..................................................................................................................16-14
    Terminating a Hanging Worker Process........................................................................................................16-15
    Restarting a Terminated Worker....................................................................................................................16-17
    Restarting a Terminated Child Process..........................................................................................................16-19
    Restarting an AD Utility After a Machine Crash..........................................................................................16-20
    Shutting Down the Manager..........................................................................................................................16-21
    AD Relink......................................................................................................................................................16-22
    AD Relink Syntax..........................................................................................................................................16-24
    AD Relink......................................................................................................................................................16-25
    Upgrade Paths................................................................................................................................................16-26
    Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................16-27
    Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................16-28
    Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................16-29
      Practice - Managing Worker Processes .....................................................................................................16-30
      Solution - Managing Worker Processes.....................................................................................................16-31
      Practice - Restarting AD Administration...................................................................................................16-33
      Solution - Restarting AD Administration ..................................................................................................16-34
      Practice - Running AD Relink ...................................................................................................................16-35
      Solution - Running AD Relink ..................................................................................................................16-36
 AutoConfig .......................................................................................................................................................17-1
   AutoConfig ....................................................................................................................................................17-3

                                                                                                                                                                   y
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................17-4
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................17-5

                                                                                                                                                                 m
   Context Files..................................................................................................................................................17-6


                                                                                                                                               de
   Benefits of the Context Files .........................................................................................................................17-8
   Applications Context File ..............................................................................................................................17-9

                                                                                                                                             a
   Database Context File....................................................................................................................................17-10

                                                                                                                                 c
   Benefits of the Context Files .........................................................................................................................17-11
   Introduction to AutoConfig ...........................................................................................................................17-14

                                                                                                                               A
   AutoConfig and the Applications Context.....................................................................................................17-15


                                                    le
   AutoConfig Template Files ...........................................................................................................................17-17
   AutoConfig Tasks..........................................................................................................................................17-18


                                                 ac
   AutoConfig Operation ...................................................................................................................................17-19


                                               r
   Running AutoConfig .....................................................................................................................................17-21
   Running AutoConfig - Application Tier........................................................................................................17-23

                                              O ly
   Running AutoConfig - Database Tier............................................................................................................17-24
   AutoConfig Log Files....................................................................................................................................17-25


                                           l & On
   Rolling Back an AutoConfig Session ............................................................................................................17-26
   Editing AutoConfig-Managed Configuration Files .......................................................................................17-28


                                         na se
   Running AutoConfig In Test Mode ...............................................................................................................17-29
   Running AutoConfig in Test Mode – Application Tier................................................................................17-30


                                       er U
   Running AutoConfig in Test Mode – Database Tier .....................................................................................17-31



                                    nt
   Running AutoConfig in Test Mode – AutoConfig Configuration Report .....................................................17-32
   Running AutoConfig in Test Mode – AutoConfig Configuration Report (cont.).........................................17-33

                                  I
   AutoConfig Configuration Report – Example...............................................................................................17-34
   AutoConfig Configuration Report – Example (cont.) ...................................................................................17-35

                 le
   Running AutoConfig from Oracle Applications Manager.............................................................................17-36

               c
   AutoConfig Main Screens .............................................................................................................................17-39


  ra
   Editing Parameters.........................................................................................................................................17-41
   Confirming Changes......................................................................................................................................17-43
   Using the Support Cart ..................................................................................................................................17-45

O  Restoring a Previous Configuration...............................................................................................................17-48

                                                     Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                           ix
    Comparing Configurations ............................................................................................................................17-51
    Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................17-52
    Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................17-53
    Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................17-54
      Practice - Editing Applications Context ....................................................................................................17-55
      Solution - Editing Applications Context....................................................................................................17-56
      Practice - Configuring your System...........................................................................................................17-58
      Solution - Modifying your System ............................................................................................................17-59
      Practice - Rolling Back an AutoConfig Session ........................................................................................17-60
      Solution - Rolling Back an AutoConfig Session .......................................................................................17-61
      Practice - Restoring a Previous Configuration...........................................................................................17-62
      Solution - Restoring a Previous Configuration ..........................................................................................17-63
      Practice - Running AutoConfig in Test Mode ...........................................................................................17-65
      Solution - Running AutoConfig in Test Mode ..........................................................................................17-66
 License Manager..............................................................................................................................................18-1
   License Manager............................................................................................................................................18-3
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................18-4
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................18-5
   Introduction to License Manager...................................................................................................................18-6
   License Manager Reports ..............................................................................................................................18-7
   Accessing License Manager ..........................................................................................................................18-8
   License Manager Home Page ........................................................................................................................18-9
   Registering Products......................................................................................................................................18-11
   Registering the E-Business Suite...................................................................................................................18-12
   Post-Registration Steps..................................................................................................................................18-17
   Registering Component Applications............................................................................................................18-18
   Registering Individual Products ....................................................................................................................18-21
   Registering Country-Specific Functionalities................................................................................................18-23
                                                                                                                                                                 m y
                                                                                                                                               de
   Registering Languages ..................................................................................................................................18-25
   License Manager Reports ..............................................................................................................................18-31

                                                                                                                                             a
   Licensed Products Report ..............................................................................................................................18-32

                                                                                                                                 c
   Shared Products Report .................................................................................................................................18-33
   Country-Specific Functionalities Report .......................................................................................................18-34

                                                                                                                               A
   Languages Report ..........................................................................................................................................18-35


                                                    le
   License Summary Report ..............................................................................................................................18-36
   Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................18-38


                                                 ac
   Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................18-39


                                               r
   Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................18-40
      Practice - Registering Products..................................................................................................................18-41

                                              O ly
      Solution - Registering Products .................................................................................................................18-42
      Practice - Registering an Additional Language .........................................................................................18-43


                                           l & On
      Solution - Registering an Additional Language.........................................................................................18-45



                                         na se
 Reporting Utilities............................................................................................................................................19-1
   Reporting Utilities .........................................................................................................................................19-3



                                       er U
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................19-4
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................19-5


                                    nt
   AD Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................19-6
   Running AD Configuration ...........................................................................................................................19-7

                                  I
   AD Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................19-8


                 le
   AD File Identification....................................................................................................................................19-10
   AD File Identification (adident) ....................................................................................................................19-11

               c
   AD File Identification....................................................................................................................................19-12



O ra
   AD Job Timing Report ..................................................................................................................................19-13
   Running the AD Job Timing Report..............................................................................................................19-16
   Reducing Critical System Downtime ............................................................................................................19-17
   Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................19-18

                                                     Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                            x
    Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................19-19
    Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................19-20
     Practice - Running AD Configuration .......................................................................................................19-21
     Solution - Running AD Configuration.......................................................................................................19-22
     Practice - Reviewing the AD Timing Report.............................................................................................19-23
     Solution - Reviewing the AD Timing Report ............................................................................................19-24
 Configuration Utilities.....................................................................................................................................20-1
   Configuration Utilities ...................................................................................................................................20-3
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................20-4
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................20-5
   AD Splicer .....................................................................................................................................................20-6
   AD Splicer Control Files ...............................................................................................................................20-8
   Editing newprods.txt......................................................................................................................................20-9
   Post-Splice Steps ...........................................................................................................................................20-11
   File Character Set Conversion .......................................................................................................................20-12
   File Character Set Conversion (adncnv)........................................................................................................20-13
   Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................20-16
   Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................20-17
   Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................20-18
      Practice - Registering a Product with AD Splicer......................................................................................20-19
      Solution - Registering a Product with AD Splicer.....................................................................................20-20
 Patching and the AutoPatch Process .............................................................................................................21-1
   Patching and the AutoPatch Process..............................................................................................................21-3
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................21-4
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................21-5

                                                                                                                                                                     y
   Patch Types ...................................................................................................................................................21-6
   Patch Terminology ........................................................................................................................................21-8
   Patch Components .........................................................................................................................................21-9
                                                                                                                                                                   m
                                                                                                                                                 de
   Patch Driver Files ..........................................................................................................................................21-10
   Other Patch Components ...............................................................................................................................21-11

                                                                                                                                               a
   Patch Creation ...............................................................................................................................................21-12

                                                                                                                                   c
   Using OracleMetaLink ..................................................................................................................................21-14

                                                                                                                                 A
   Downloading a Patch.....................................................................................................................................21-15
   AutoPatch Overview......................................................................................................................................21-16

                                                    le
   AutoPatch Operations....................................................................................................................................21-18



                                                 ac
   AutoPatch Features Platform and Translation Checks ..................................................................................21-21
   AutoPatch Features Applied Patches Database .............................................................................................21-22

                                               r
   AutoPatch Features Patch History File Changes ...........................................................................................21-23


                                              O ly
   AutoPatch Features Prerequisite Patch Checking Using Codelevel ..............................................................21-24
   AutoPatch Features Checkfile Feature ..........................................................................................................21-25



                                           l & On
   AutoPatch Features Applying Merged Patches .............................................................................................21-26
   AutoPatch Features Password Hider..............................................................................................................21-27



                                         na se
   Applying a Patch ...........................................................................................................................................21-28
   Applying a Patch to a Multi-Node System ....................................................................................................21-30



                                       er U
   Patch Application Documentation Files ........................................................................................................21-32
   Patching Options ...........................................................................................................................................21-33


                                    nt
   Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................21-35
   Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................21-36

                                  I
   Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................21-37


                 le
     Practice - Downloading Patches ................................................................................................................21-38
     Solution - Downloading Patches................................................................................................................21-39

               c
  ra
 Patch Wizard ...................................................................................................................................................22-1
   Patch Wizard .................................................................................................................................................22-3
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................22-4
O  Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................22-5

                                                      Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                           xi
    Patch Wizard .................................................................................................................................................22-6
    Accessing Patch Wizard ................................................................................................................................22-8
    Patch Wizard Main Page ...............................................................................................................................22-9
    Patch Wizard Main Page - Results ................................................................................................................22-10
    Patch Wizard .................................................................................................................................................22-11
    Downloading the Patch Information Bundle .................................................................................................22-12
    Patch Wizard Preferences Page .....................................................................................................................22-13
    Define Patch Filters .......................................................................................................................................22-15
    Recommended Patches ..................................................................................................................................22-18
    Recommend Patches......................................................................................................................................22-19
    Download Patches .........................................................................................................................................22-21
    Patch Wizard Job Status ................................................................................................................................22-23
    Job Status.......................................................................................................................................................22-24
    Recommended Patches Results .....................................................................................................................22-26
    Patch Impact Analysis ...................................................................................................................................22-28
    Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................22-31
    Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................22-32
    Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................22-33
      Practice - Defining the Staging Directory..................................................................................................22-34
      Solution - Defining the Staging Directory .................................................................................................22-35
      Practice - Defining Patch Filters................................................................................................................22-36
      Solution - Defining Patch Filters ...............................................................................................................22-38
      Practice - Uploading the Patch Information Bundle ..................................................................................22-39
      Solution - Uploading the Patch Information Bundle .................................................................................22-40
      Practice - Submitting and Viewing Requests.............................................................................................22-41
      Solution - Submitting and Viewing Requests ............................................................................................22-42
      Practice - Analyzing Patch Impact.............................................................................................................22-43
      Solution - Analyzing Patch Impact ............................................................................................................22-44
                                                                                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                                                                                 de
 Running AutoPatch .........................................................................................................................................23-1
   Running AutoPatch........................................................................................................................................23-3

                                                                                                                                               a
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................23-4

                                                                                                                                   c
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................23-5
   AutoPatch Setup Tasks..................................................................................................................................23-6

                                                                                                                                 A
   Starting AutoPatch.........................................................................................................................................23-9


                                                    le
   AutoPatch Prompts ........................................................................................................................................23-10
   System Questions ..........................................................................................................................................23-16


                                                 ac
   Patch File Name and Location.......................................................................................................................23-17


                                               r
   Read Driver File and Check Prereqs..............................................................................................................23-18
   Translation Patch Reminder ..........................................................................................................................23-19

                                              O ly
   Number of Workers .......................................................................................................................................23-20
   Messages........................................................................................................................................................23-21


                                           l & On
   Patch History .................................................................................................................................................23-22
   Update Snapshot ............................................................................................................................................23-23


                                         na se
   Timing Report and Completion Message ......................................................................................................23-24
   Main AutoPatch Log File ..............................................................................................................................23-25


                                       er U
   Other AutoPatch Log Files ............................................................................................................................23-26



                                    nt
   Post AutoPatch Tasks ....................................................................................................................................23-27
   If AutoPatch Fails..........................................................................................................................................23-28

                                  I
   When a Worker Fails.....................................................................................................................................23-29
   Restarting AutoPatch.....................................................................................................................................23-30

                 le
   Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................23-33

               c
   Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................23-34


  ra
   Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................23-35
      Practice - Preparing to Run AutoPatch ......................................................................................................23-36
      Solution - Preparing to Run AutoPatch .....................................................................................................23-37

O     Practice - Running AutoPatch....................................................................................................................23-38

                                                      Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                           xii
        Solution - Running AutoPatch...................................................................................................................23-39
 OAM Timing Reports .....................................................................................................................................24-1
  OAM Timing Reports....................................................................................................................................24-3
  Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................24-4
  Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................24-5
  OAM Timing Reports....................................................................................................................................24-6
  Timing Reports Main Page............................................................................................................................24-8
  AutoPatch Timing Details .............................................................................................................................24-10
  Tracking a Patch Session ...............................................................................................................................24-14
  OAM Restricted Mode ..................................................................................................................................24-15
  Tracking a Patch Session ...............................................................................................................................24-17
  AD Administration Timing Details ...............................................................................................................24-19
  Job Timing.....................................................................................................................................................24-20
  Phase Information Report..............................................................................................................................24-22
  Exceptions Report..........................................................................................................................................24-23
  Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................24-25
  Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................24-26
  Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................24-27
    Practice - Accessing the Timing Reports...................................................................................................24-28
    Solution - Accessing the Timing Reports ..................................................................................................24-29
    Practice - Tracking an In-Progress AutoPatch Session..............................................................................24-30
    Solution - Tracking an In-Progress AutoPatch Session .............................................................................24-31
 Other Patching Topics.....................................................................................................................................25-1
   Other Patching Topics ...................................................................................................................................25-3
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................25-4
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................25-5
   AutoPatch Modes ..........................................................................................................................................25-6
   AutoPatch Test Mode ....................................................................................................................................25-7
                                                                                                                                                                 m y
                                                                                                                                               de
   Using AutoPatch in Test Mode......................................................................................................................25-9
   AutoPatch Pre-Install Mode ..........................................................................................................................25-10

                                                                                                                                             a
   Using AutoPatch in Pre-Install Mode............................................................................................................25-13

                                                                                                                                 c
   AutoPatch Non-Interactive Mode..................................................................................................................25-14

                                                                                                                               A
   AutoPatch Non-Interactive Mode Creating a Defaults File..........................................................................25-15
   Using AutoPatch in Non-Interactive Mode ...................................................................................................25-16

                                                    le
   Restarting a Non-Interactive Session.............................................................................................................25-17



                                                 ac
   AutoPatch Options.........................................................................................................................................25-18
   AutoPatch Command Line Arguments - apply..............................................................................................25-19

                                               r
   AutoPatch Command Line Arguments - driver .............................................................................................25-20


                                              O ly
   AutoPatch Command Line Arguments - patchtop.........................................................................................25-21
   AutoPatch Command Line Arguments - preinstall........................................................................................25-22



                                           l & On
   AutoPatch Command Line Arguments - uploadph........................................................................................25-23
   AutoPatch Command Line Arguments - options...........................................................................................25-24



                                         na se
   AutoPatch Options - autoconfig ....................................................................................................................25-25
   AutoPatch Options - checkfile.......................................................................................................................25-26



                                       er U
   AutoPatch Options - compiledb.....................................................................................................................25-27
   AutoPatch Options - compilejsp....................................................................................................................25-28


                                    nt
   AutoPatch Options - copyportion ..................................................................................................................25-29
   AutoPatch Options - databaseportion ............................................................................................................25-30

                                  I
   AutoPatch Options - generateportion ............................................................................................................25-31


                 le
   AutoPatch Options - hotpatch........................................................................................................................25-32
   AutoPatch Options - integrity........................................................................................................................25-33

               c
   AutoPatch Options - parallel .........................................................................................................................25-34



O ra
   AutoPatch Options - phtofile .........................................................................................................................25-35
   AutoPatch Options - validate.........................................................................................................................25-36
   Java Release Infrastructure (JRI)...................................................................................................................25-37
   Java File Patching..........................................................................................................................................25-38

                                                     Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                           xiii
    Adding Translations and New Products ........................................................................................................25-39
    Using Test and Production Systems ..............................................................................................................25-40
    AD Merge Patch ............................................................................................................................................25-41
    Merging Patches ............................................................................................................................................25-42
    Merging Unzipped ARUs ..............................................................................................................................25-44
    Source and Destination Directories ...............................................................................................................25-45
    Running AD Merge Patch .............................................................................................................................25-46
    Using the Manifest File .................................................................................................................................25-47
    AD Merge Patch ............................................................................................................................................25-48
    Naming the Merged Patch .............................................................................................................................25-49
    Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................25-50
    Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................25-51
    Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................25-52
      Practice - Running AutoPatch Non-Interactively ......................................................................................25-53
      Solution - Running AutoPatch Non-Interactively......................................................................................25-54
      Practice - Merging Patches ........................................................................................................................25-56
      Solution - Merging Patches .......................................................................................................................25-57
 Applied Patches Information..........................................................................................................................26-1
   Applied Patches Information .........................................................................................................................26-3
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................26-4
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................26-5
   Applied Patches Information .........................................................................................................................26-7
   Applied Patches Information and AutoPatch Modes....................................................................................26-12
   Normal Mode.................................................................................................................................................26-13
   Test Mode......................................................................................................................................................26-14

                                                                                                                                                                   y
   Pre-Install Mode ............................................................................................................................................26-15
   Accessing Applied Patches Information........................................................................................................26-16
   Applied Patches Search Pages .......................................................................................................................26-17
                                                                                                                                                                 m
                                                                                                                                               de
   Applied Patches Simple Search .....................................................................................................................26-18
   Applied Patches Advanced Search ................................................................................................................26-20

                                                                                                                                             a
   File History Search Pages..............................................................................................................................26-22

                                                                                                                                 c
   File History Simple Search............................................................................................................................26-23
   File History Advanced Search .......................................................................................................................26-25

                                                                                                                               A
   Applied Patches Reports................................................................................................................................26-27


                                                    le
   Patch Details Report ......................................................................................................................................26-28
   Files Copied Report .......................................................................................................................................26-30


                                                 ac
   Bug Fixes Report...........................................................................................................................................26-31


                                               r
   Action Summary Report................................................................................................................................26-32
   Action Details Report ....................................................................................................................................26-34

                                              O ly
   Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................26-36
   Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................26-37


                                           l & On
   Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................26-38
      Practice - Searching for Applied Patches Information...............................................................................26-39


                                         na se
      Solution - Searching for Applied Patches Information ..............................................................................26-40



                                       er U
 Cloning Oracle Applications...........................................................................................................................27-1
   Cloning Oracle Applications .........................................................................................................................27-3


                                    nt
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................27-4
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................27-5

                                  I
   Cloning Oracle Applications .........................................................................................................................27-6


                 le
   Cloning Uses .................................................................................................................................................27-7
   Rapid Clone ...................................................................................................................................................27-8

               c
   Cloning Phases ..............................................................................................................................................27-9



O ra
   Overview of Prerequisite Steps .....................................................................................................................27-10
   Verify Source and Target Nodes Software Versions - Perl ...........................................................................27-11
   Verify Source and Target Nodes Software Versions - Zip ............................................................................27-12
   Apply the Latest AutoConfig Template Patch...............................................................................................27-13

                                                     Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                           xiv
    Apply the Latest Rapid Clone Patches ..........................................................................................................27-14
    Run AutoConfig on the Application Tier ......................................................................................................27-15
    Copy Utility Files to the RDBMS_ORACLE_HOME ..................................................................................27-16
    Run AutoConfig on the Database Tier ..........................................................................................................27-17
    Maintain Snapshot Information .....................................................................................................................27-18
    Overview of Cloning Steps............................................................................................................................27-19
    Clone Oracle Applications.............................................................................................................................27-20
    Prepare the Source System Database Tier for Cloning..................................................................................27-21
    Prepare the Source System Application Tier for Cloning..............................................................................27-22
    Copy the Source System to the Target System..............................................................................................27-23
    Copy the Application Tier File System .........................................................................................................27-24
    Copy the Database Tier File System..............................................................................................................27-25
    Configure the Target System Database Node................................................................................................27-26
    Configure the Target System Application Server Nodes...............................................................................27-27
    Finishing Tasks..............................................................................................................................................27-28
    Check for and Update Instance-Specific Settings..........................................................................................27-29
    Other Finishing Tasks....................................................................................................................................27-38
    Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................27-39
    Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................27-40
    Module Practice.............................................................................................................................................27-41
      Practice - Cloning Oracle Applications: Preparatory Tasks ......................................................................27-42
      Solution - Cloning Oracle Applications: Preparatory Tasks......................................................................27-43
      Practice - Cloning Oracle Applications: Cloning Tasks ............................................................................27-44
      Solution - Cloning Oracle Applications: Cloning Tasks ...........................................................................27-46
      Practice - Cloning Oracle Applications: Finishing Tasks ..........................................................................27-48
      Solution - Cloning Oracle Applications: Finishing Tasks .........................................................................27-49
 Advanced Cloning Options .............................................................................................................................28-1
   Advanced Cloning Options............................................................................................................................28-3
                                                                                                                                                                 m y
                                                                                                                                               de
   Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................28-4
   Module Overview ..........................................................................................................................................28-5

                                                                                                                                             a
   Advanced Cloning Options............................................................................................................................28-6

                                                                                                                                 c
   Refreshing a Target System...........................................................................................................................28-7
   Cloning Multi-Node Systems ........................................................................................................................28-11

                                                                                                                               A
   Adding a New Node to an Existing System ..................................................................................................28-13


                                                    le
   Refresh a Cloned Target System ...................................................................................................................28-14
   Prepare the Source System ............................................................................................................................28-15


                                                 ac
   Copy the Source System to the Target System..............................................................................................28-16


                                               r
   Configure the Target System .........................................................................................................................28-17
   Finishing Tasks..............................................................................................................................................28-18

                                              O ly
   Clone a Single-Node System to a Multi-Node System.................................................................................28-19
   Clone a Single Node System to a Multi-Node System .................................................................................28-20


                                           l & On
   Prerequisite Steps ..........................................................................................................................................28-21
   Clone Oracle Applications.............................................................................................................................28-22


                                         na se
   Finishing Tasks..............................................................................................................................................28-23
   Cloning a Multi-Node System to a Multi-Node System...............................................................................28-24


                                       er U
   Adding a Node...............................................................................................................................................28-25



                                    nt
   Reducing the Number of Nodes ....................................................................................................................28-26
   Module Summary ..........................................................................................................................................28-27

                                  I
   Module Discussion ........................................................................................................................................28-28




               c le
O ra
                                                     Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                           xv
                                         m y
                                     a de
                                  A c
                             le
                        r ac
                       O ly
                    l & On
                  na se
             nt er U
           I
    c le
O ra
 Preface
 Profile
 Before You Begin This Course

      •    Thorough knowledge of your operating environment and software.

      •    Working experience with database software.

 Prerequisites

      •    There are no formal prerequisites for this course.

 How This Course Is Organized

 This is an instructor-led course featuring lecture and hands-on exercises. Online demonstrations
 and written practice sessions reinforce the concepts and skills introduced.




                                                                                                         m y
                                                                                                     a de
                                                                                                  A c
                                         le
                                    r ac
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
           c le
O ra
                                     Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                           xvii
 Related Publications
 Oracle Publications
                                       Title                                                               Part Number
 Oracle Applications Concepts                                                                     B31450
 Oracle Applications Installation Guide: Using Rapid Install                                      B31295
 Oracle Applications Maintenance Utilities                                                        B31568
 Oracle Applications Patching Procedures                                                          B31567

 Additional Publications

      •    System release bulletins

      •    Installation and user’s guides

      •    Read-me files

      •    International Oracle User’s Group (IOUG) articles

      •    Oracle Magazine

                                                                                                                         m y
                                                                                                              a de
                                                                                                     A c
                                         le
                                    r ac
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
           c le
O ra
                                     Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                           xviii
 Typographic Conventions
 Typographic Conventions in Text
 Convention        Element                    Example
 Bold italic       Glossary term (if          The algorithm inserts the new key.
                   there is a glossary)
 Caps and          Buttons,                   Click the Executable button.
 lowercase         check boxes,               Select the Can’t Delete Card check box.
                   triggers,                  Assign a When-Validate-Item trigger to the ORD block.
                   windows                    Open the Master Schedule window.
 Courier new,      Code output,               Code output: debug.set (‘I”, 300);
 case sensitive    directory names,           Directory: bin (DOS), $FMHOME (UNIX)
 (default is       filenames,                 Filename: Locate the init.ora file.
 lowercase)        passwords,                 Password: User tiger as your password.
                   pathnames,                 Pathname: Open c:\my_docs\projects
                   URLs,                      URL: Go to http://www.oracle.com
                   user input,
                                              User input: Enter 300
                   usernames
                                              Username: Log on as scott
 Initial cap       Graphics labels            Customer address (but Oracle Payables)
                   (unless the term is a

 Italic
                   proper noun)
                   Emphasized words           Do not save changes to the database.
                                                                                                            m y
                                                                                                       de
                   and phrases,               For further information, see Oracle7 Server SQL Language
                   titles of books and        Reference Manual.
                   courses,
                   variables
                                              Enter user_id@us.oracle.com, where user_id is the
                                              name of the user.
                                                                                                    ca
 Quotation
 marks
                   Interface elements
                   with long names                                                                A
                                              Select “Include a reusable module component” and click Finish.

                   that have only
                                         le   This subject is covered in Unit II, Lesson 3, “Working with


                                      ac
                   initial caps;              Objects.”
                   lesson and chapter


 Uppercase
                   titles in cross-
                   references
                   SQL column
                                    r
                                   O ly       Use the SELECT command to view information stored in the


                                l & On
                   names, commands,           LAST_NAME
                   functions, schemas,        column of the EMP table.


                              na se
                   table names


                            er U
 Arrow             Menu paths                 Select File > Save.
 Brackets          Key names                  Press [Enter].


                         nt
 Commas            Key sequences              Press and release keys one at a time:

 Plus signs            I
                   Key combinations
                                              [Alternate], [F], [D]
                                              Press and hold these keys simultaneously: [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Del]


            c le
O ra
                                     Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                           xix
 Typographic Conventions in Code
 Convention        Element                    Example
 Caps and          Oracle Forms               When-Validate-Item
 lowercase         triggers
 Lowercase         Column names,              SELECT last_name
                   table names                FROM s_emp;

                   Passwords                  DROP USER scott
                                              IDENTIFIED BY tiger;
                   PL/SQL objects             OG_ACTIVATE_LAYER
                                                (OG_GET_LAYER (‘prod_pie_layer’))


 Lowercase         Syntax variables           CREATE ROLE role
 italic
 Uppercase         SQL commands and SELECT userid
                   functions        FROM emp;

 Typographic Conventions in Oracle Application Navigation Paths
 This course uses simplified navigation paths, such as the following example, to direct you
 through Oracle Applications.

 (N) Invoice > Entry > Invoice Batches Summary (M) Query > Find (B) Approve
                                                                                                          m y
 This simplified path translates to the following:

                                                                                                      a de
 1.   (N) From the Navigator window, select Invoice then Entry then Invoice Batches
      Summary.
                                                                                                   A c
 2.
                                         le
      (M) From the menu, select Query then Find.

 3.   (B) Click the Approve button.
                                    r ac
 Notations:
                                   O ly
                                l & On
      (N) = Navigator


                              na se
      (M) = Menu

      (T) = Tab

                         nt er U
      (B) = Button
                       I
             le
      (I) = Icon

           c
O ra  (H) = Hyperlink

      (ST) = Sub Tab

                                      Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                           xx
 Typographical Conventions in Oracle Application Help System Paths
 This course uses a “navigation path” convention to represent actions you perform to find
 pertinent information in the Oracle Applications Help System.

 The following help navigation path, for example—

         (Help) General Ledger > Journals > Enter Journals

 —represents the following sequence of actions:

 1.   In the navigation frame of the help system window, expand the General Ledger entry.

 2.   Under the General Ledger entry, expand Journals.

 3.   Under Journals, select Enter Journals.

 4.   Review the Enter Journals topic that appears in the document frame of the help system
      window.




                                                                                                         m y
                                                                                                     a de
                                                                                                  A c
                                         le
                                    r ac
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
           c le
O ra
                                     Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                           xxi
                                                                                                         m y
                                                                                                     a de
                                                                                                  A c
                                         le
                                    r ac
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
           c le
O ra
                                     Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 R12 Oracle: Install, Patch, and Maintain Oracle Applications Table of Contents
                                                           xxii
                                                          Oracle Applications Overview
                                                          Chapter 1



                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                                Chapter 1 - Page 1
                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                                Chapter 1 - Page 2
 Oracle Applications Overview




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                                Chapter 1 - Page 3
 Module Overview




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Overview
                                        le
                                     ac
  This module introduces the different programs and components that make up Oracle
  Applications Release 12. It describes the components that are stored and processed in the
                                   r
  Oracle Applications database as well as the components stored in the Oracle Applications file
                                  O ly
  system. It also explains the various component applications and how dependencies exist


                               l & On
  between them. A brief introduction of the Vision Demo database is also provided.
  Many of the components and processes introduced in this module are described in further


                             na se
  detail in subsequent modules.




                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                                Chapter 1 - Page 4
 Oracle E-Business Suite




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Oracle E-Business Suite
                                        le
                                     ac
  Oracle E-Business Suite is a suite of integrated software applications that provides a complete
  solution to the business needs of enterprises of all types and sizes. Each E-Business Suite
                                   r
  product provides services for a particular business area, such as Inventory or Accounts
  Receivable.
                                  O ly
                               l & On
  Oracle E-Business Suite includes component applications such as:
    • Applications Technology

                             na se
    • Customer Relationship Management (CRM)


                           er U
    • Financials


                        nt
    • Supply Chain

                      I
    • Human Resource Management Systems (HRMS)


            le
    • Manufacturing

          c
    • Projects



O ra• Public Sector



                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                                Chapter 1 - Page 5
 Oracle E-Business Suite Home Page




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Oracle E-Business Suite Home Page
                                        le
                                     ac
  After logging into Oracle E-Business Suite, the first page the user sees is the Oracle E-
  Business Suite Home Page. This page is the starting point to access both the HTML interface
                                   r
  and the Forms interface, and it provides seamless navigation to all areas of the system. The
                                  O ly
  Oracle E-Business Suite Home Page provides a consistent look and feel across all Oracle


                               l & On
  Applications products.
  As shown in the screen shot, you can:


                             na se
  1. View or respond to your most important notifications from the Worklist.


                           er U
  2. Access E-Business Suite functions from the Navigator.


                        nt
  3. Set Preferences.

                      I
  4. Navigate to frequently-used functions or Web pages from Favorites.



          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                                Chapter 1 - Page 6
 HTML Interface




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 HTML Interface
                                        le
                                     ac
  The HTML interface is used for many products, including iExpense (Self-Service Expenses),
  Self-Service Human Resources, Internet Procurement, Internet Receivables, Self-Service Time,
                                   r
  Web Suppliers, iStore, iPayment, iSupport, iMarketing, and eTravel. These products extend the
                                  O ly
  functionality of the Oracle E-Business Suite by adding a browser–based, “walk up and use”


                               l & On
  functionality. All HTML (Framework-based) pages have an integrated personalization feature
  that enables both users and administrator to personalize the look and feel of the page.


                             na se
  The HTML-interface applications can be either inquiry or transactional. The difference is that


                           er U
  inquiry modules only read the Oracle Applications database, whereas transactional modules
  can update the database.


                      I nt
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                                Chapter 1 - Page 7
 HTML Interface




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 HTML Interface
                                        le
                                     ac
  The HTML Interface architecture includes or utilizes the following components:
   • A Web browser
                                   r
                                  O ly
   • The Oracle HTTP server, powered by Apache
   • HTML and XML files

                               l & On
   • JavaServer Pages, JavaBeans, and Servlets


                             na se
   • Oracle database


                           er U
   Features highlighted in the screen shot are:


                        nt
   1. Process Train
   2. Date Picker
   3. Global Links    I
            le
   4. List of Values Icon
          c
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                                Chapter 1 - Page 8
 Forms Interface




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Forms Interface
                                        le
                                     ac
  Some products in the Oracle E-Business Suite utilize the Forms interface. This flexible and
  powerful user interface facilitates performing complex transactions and inputting high volumes
  of data.                         r
                                  O ly
  Oracle Applications Release 12 uses Forms 10g (part of Developer 10g).


                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                                Chapter 1 - Page 9
 Forms Interface




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Forms Interface
                                        le
                                     ac
  One of the key application tier software components used by many Oracle E-Business Suite
  products is Forms services, which mediate between the Forms client (a Java applet running on
                                   r
  the desktop), and the Oracle database server on the database tier.
                                  O ly
  Features highlighted in the screen shot are:


                               l & On
  1. Single-Row Block


                             na se
  2. Multi-Row Block
  3. Folder Indicator

                           er U
  4. Current Record Indicator
  5. Record
                        nt
  6. Field
                      I
            le
  7. List of Values Indicator

          c
  8. Descriptive Flexfield



O ra
  9. Master-Detail Coordination Box



                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                               Chapter 1 - Page 10
 Concurrent Processing




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Concurrent Processing
                                        le
                                     ac
  A concurrent program is an executable program that runs in the background. It can run
  simultaneously both with online (interactive) programs and with other concurrent programs,
                                   r
  fully utilizing your hardware capacity.
                                  O ly
  Typically, concurrent programs are used to support long-running, data-intensive tasks, such as


                               l & On
  posting a journal or generating a report. Concurrent programs run on the Concurrent
  Processing server. Reports are translated and available in all languages supported by Oracle


                             na se
  Applications.




                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                               Chapter 1 - Page 11
 System Overview




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 System Overview
                                        le
                                     ac
  Oracle Applications utilizes a three-tier architecture. These tiers are the desktop tier, the
  application tier, and the database tier.
                                   r
    • The desktop tier consists of the Web browser
                                  O ly
    • The application (or middle) tier includes Web services, Forms services, and the

                               l & On
       Concurrent Processing server


                             na se
    • The database tier contains the Oracle database server




                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                               Chapter 1 - Page 12
 Oracle Applications




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Oracle Applications
                                        le
                                     ac
  Oracle Applications consists of
    • A file system containing:
                                   r
                                  O ly
        - Forms that allow interactive entry and updating of data
        - Reports that allow formatted display of data

                               l & On
        - Concurrent programs that provide high-volume, non-interactive update of data


                             na se
        - Programs and SQL scripts for maintaining the system


                           er U
        - HTML, XML, and Java that perform certain user interface and business functions


                        nt
    • An Oracle database containing:
        - Data objects, such as tables and indexes used to store customer data
                      I
        - Code objects, such as views, grants, synonyms, and PL/SQL stored procedures and


          c le
           triggers for performing database processing




O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                               Chapter 1 - Page 13
 Applications Technology Stack for Release 12




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                        le
 Oracle Applications and the Applications Technology Stack


                                     ac
  Oracle Applications Release 12 works in conjunction with the Oracle database server and
  associated Oracle Tools products. Oracle Applications gathers and processes customer data,
                                   r
  and stores it in the Oracle database. The Applications technology stack products, such as
                                  O ly
  Oracle Developer, provide multi-tier, distributed processing capability.


                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                               Chapter 1 - Page 14
 Rapid Install




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Rapid Install
                                        le
                                     ac
  Rapid Install is the only supported method of installing Oracle Applications for Release 12. All
  Oracle components packaged with Rapid Install are pre-certified for use with Release 12.
                                   r
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                               Chapter 1 - Page 15
 Rapid Install Technology Stack Components




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                        le
 Rapid Install Technology Stack Components


                                     ac
  Before upgrading any technology stack component, refer to the Certify site to verify that the
  combination of platform and components that you plan to use are fully certified by Oracle
                                   r
  Applications: https://metalink.oracle.com/metalink/plsql/certify.welcome
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                               Chapter 1 - Page 16
 Product Families




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Product Families
                                        le
                                     ac
  The component products that make up Oracle Applications are grouped into product families
  by functionality. Some examples are shown on the slide. Each component application may
                                   r
  contain a number of products. For example, Payables, Receivables, and General Ledger are
                                  O ly
  three of the many members of the Financials product family.


                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                               Chapter 1 - Page 17
 Example Standard Product Identifiers




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Standard Product Identifiers
                                        le
                                     ac
  Each product has multiple identifiers:

                                   r
    • ID is Applications ID. It is used when identifying setup data for the product.

                                  O ly
    • Product abbreviation is a two- or three-letter abbreviation for the product. It appears in the
       file system path and names of files as well as the standard prefix for all database objects.

                               l & On
    • Full name is the name of the Oracle Applications product. It is displayed in pick lists.


                             na se
  These identifiers are used throughout Oracle Applications and are commonly used when
  referring to Oracle Applications products. Some example identifiers are shown on the slide.



                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                               Chapter 1 - Page 18
 Product Registration




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                               Chapter 1 - Page 19
 Product Dependencies




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Product Dependencies
                                        le
                                     ac
  The products that make up Oracle Applications are tightly integrated. Some products depend
  on components from other products, called dependent or shared products, for full functionality.
                                   r
  The slide shows a simplified example of product dependencies:
                                  O ly
    • General Ledger (GL) depends on the Application Object Library (FND) and Oracle

                               l & On
      Receivables (AR).


                             na se
    • Inventory (INV) depends on FND and GL.
    • Receivables (AR) depends on FND, INV, and GL.



                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                               Chapter 1 - Page 20
 Vision Demo Database




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Vision Demo Database
                                        le
                                     ac
  The Vision Demonstration database provides a sample set of transaction data for a fictitious
  company that uses most Oracle Applications Release 12 products. The Vision Demo is
  installed using Rapid Install.   r
                                  O ly
  The Vision Demo simulates a real production configuration. As such, it can be updated and


                               l & On
  maintained using Oracle Applications utilities.
  You can use the Vision Demo as a testing and training environment. You can also use it to

                             na se
  learn about new products to help decide whether you want to expand the number of Oracle


                           er U
  Applications products you currently have licensed and implemented.



                      I nt
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                               Chapter 1 - Page 21
 Module Summary




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Overview
                                               Chapter 1 - Page 22
                                                             Preparing for Your
                                                             Installation
                                                             Chapter 2

                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                   Chapter 2 - Page 1
                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                   Chapter 2 - Page 2
 Preparing For Your Installation




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                   Chapter 2 - Page 3
 Objectives




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                   Chapter 2 - Page 4
 Module Overview




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Overview
                                          le
                                       ac
  This module discusses Rapid Install and its key role in the installation of Oracle Applications
  Release 12.
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                   Chapter 2 - Page 5
 Rapid Install




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Rapid Install
                                          le
                                       ac
  With Rapid Install, you can perform the following tasks:

                                     r
   • Install a new, fully configured Oracle Applications system, including the latest certified
      technology stack, patches, and other updates available at the time of release
                                    O ly
   • Lay down the file system and configure server processes for an upgraded system

                                 l & On
   • Install a new database node or Applications node technology stack


                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                   Chapter 2 - Page 6
 Rapid Install




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Rapid Install
                                          le
                                       ac
  Rapid Install lays down each of the components shown in this slide:

                                     r
   • Oracle database, including all necessary database files

                                    O ly
   • Applications technology stack, which includes two different Oracle Application Server
      (OracleAS) 10g releases, installed in separate ORACLE_HOMEs. This strategy enables

                                 l & On
      Oracle Applications to take advantage of the latest technologies, and is described further
      on the following slides.

                               na se
   • Oracle Applications file system, including new Instance Top ($INST_TOP)



                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                   Chapter 2 - Page 7
 Technology Stack Components




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Technology Stack Components
                                          le
                                       ac
  A multi-node installation of Release 11i required each application tier to maintain its own file
  system, consisting of the APPL_TOP file system (APPL_TOP, COMMON_TOP, and a few
                                     r
  related directories) and the application tier technology stack file system (8.0.6
                                    O ly
  ORACLE_HOME and iAS ORACLE_HOME). Later, the Release 11.5.10.2 Rapid Install


                                 l & On
  introduced support for a shared file system.
  In Release 12, Rapid Install will by default create a system that shares the application tier file


                               na se
  system as well as the APPL_TOP and COMMON_TOP file systems. The application tier file


                             er U
  system can therefore be shared across multiple application tier nodes (provided they are
  running the same operating system).


                        I nt
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                   Chapter 2 - Page 8
 Technology Stack Components




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Oracle Developer 10g
                                          le
                                       ac
  The Applications node technology stack includes Oracle Developer 10g, which includes:
    • Oracle Forms
                                     r
                                    O ly
    • Oracle Reports (only for use with Concurrent Processing, not a stand-alone server)
  The Developer products are installed in the Application Server 10.1.2 Oracle Home directory,

                                 l & On
  which is sometimes also referred to as the Tools Oracle Home or C Oracle Home.


                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                   Chapter 2 - Page 9
 Technology Stack Components




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Oracle HTTP Server
                                          le
                                       ac
  The Application Server 10.1.3 ORACLE_HOME directory is used for the Oracle HTTP
  Server. It is sometimes also referred to as the Web Oracle Home or Java ORACLE_HOME.
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 10
 Release 12 Applications Technology Stack – Key Changes




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Key Changes
                                          le
                                       ac
  This slide summarizes the main changes to the Applications technology stack in Release 12.

                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 11
 Release 12 Platforms




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Release 12 Platforms
                                          le
                                       ac
  It is essential to review the relevant platform-specific Installation Update Note prior to
  performing the installation.
                                     r
  These are available on OracleMetaLink as follows:
                                    O ly
     • Sun Solaris (SPARC) – Note 402312.1

                                 l & On
     • Linux 32-bit – Note 402310.1


                               na se
     • Linux 64-bit – Note 416305.1
     • Microsoft Windows – Note 402311.1

                             er U
     • HP-UX (PA-RISC) – Note 402308.1

                          nt
     • HP-UX (Itanium) – Note 402307.1
                        I
     • IBM AIX 5L – Note 402306.1


           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 12
 Software Requirements




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Software Requirements
                                          le
                                       ac
    The utilities shown on the slide must be included in the PATH variable of the user account
       that is to run the Rapid Install wizard.
 X Display Server                    r
                                    O ly
  This display must always be accessible during runtime. Set it to an active and authorized X

                                 l & On
  Windows display, pointing to a machine that is always available to the instance. For more
  details, see OracleMetaLink Note 153960.1, X Server Testing and Troubleshooting.

                               na se
 Specific Requirements for Windows


                             er U
  Release 12 has additional software requirements for Windows:


                          nt
         - Microsoft Visual C++ 8.0 (http://www.microsoft.com)

                        I
         - gnu make (shareware) Version 3.81 (http://www.gnu.org). Obtainable via Oracle


             le
             patch 5897842, which contains the source files and the pre-built executable file,
             gnumake.exe
           c
  ra
         - MKS Toolkit Version 9 (Patch 3) or higher (http://www.mks.com)


O
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 13
   Free software from Cygwin (http://www.cygwin.com) can be used instead of MKS Toolkit to
   provide the UNIX scripting commands needed for the AD utilities. However, Oracle
   recommends using the MKS Toolkit for all critical systems.




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 14
 CPU Requirements




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 CPU Requirements
                                          le
                                       ac
  Because there are different product combinations, different user profiles, and different
  configurations, there is no one sizing answer for all hardware platforms. Some hardware
                                     r
  vendors have sizing worksheets that model the CPU and memory requirements of Oracle
  Applications on their hardware.
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
  The most reliable strategy to ensure that the hardware is sized appropriately is to install a test
  environment, and then set a benchmark with a configuration, product mix, and user load that


                               na se
  simulates your own current and expected workloads. These "actual“ conditions can help verify


                             er U
  performance before you install your production-ready environment. If such a benchmark is not
  feasible, Oracle Consulting Services and your hardware vendor can help you find another

                          nt
  Oracle Applications system running a product mix and user profile similar to yours.

                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 15
 Memory Requirements




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Memory Requirements
                                          le
                                       ac
  In carrying out the calculations on the slide, you should aim to allow for any expected growth
  in usage over the planned lifetime of this Applications system, although the increasing usage of
                                     r
  Oracle Real Application Clusters and related technologies means that it is now easier to scale
                                    O ly
  up a system by adding another machine.


                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 16
 Disk Space Requirements




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Disk Space Requirements (File System)
                                          le
                                       ac
  Rapid Install installs the file system and database files for all products, regardless of their
  licensed status. The size of the application tier file system objects is approximately 28 GB.
                                     r
  This includes the OracleAS 10.1.2 ORACLE_HOME, OracleAS 10.1.3 ORACLE_HOME,
                                    O ly
  COMMON_TOP, APPL_TOP, and INST_TOP.


                                 l & On
  The disk size required for the database tier files is approximately 45 GB for a fresh install
  database and 133 GB for a Vision Demo database.


                               na se
  Stage area: If you run Rapid Install from a stage area, you need at least 33 GB to


                             er U
  accommodate the file system and database files in your stage area.


                          nt
  Applications log and output files: Many Oracle Applications products generate log and
  output files during runtime. The disk space needed for log and output files varies with the
                        I
  number of users and usage, and depends on how frequently you purge these files.

             le
  Log and output files are not automatically purged. It is advisable to determine a strategy for

           c
  archiving and purging these files after the installation, and monitor the disk space they



O ra
  consume to determine how much space you may need in the future.



                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 17
 Disk Space Requirements (cont.)




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Disk Space Requirements (File System)
                                          le
                                       ac
  Temporary directories and files: For installation time temporary disk space, Rapid Install
  uses the temporary directory defined by the TMPDIR variable (on UNIX) or TEMP and TMP
                                     r
  variables (on Windows). You should ensure there is at least 500 MB of free temporary space
  when carrying out an installation.
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
  Oracle Applications also requires temporary runtime disk space. For example, each concurrent
  manager writes temporary parameter files and Oracle Forms writes temporary record buffers.


                               na se
  Rapid Install sets the temporary directory to the value you supply on the derived settings


                             er U
  screen. Rapid Install sets the temporary directory based on the value you supply on node-
  specific settings screens.

                          nt
  Updates and patches: You need disk space for applying updates, patches, maintenance packs,

                        I
  family packs, and mini-packs, as well as backup copies of files that may be created when

             le
  applying an update or patch.

           c
  Other files: The total disk space estimate must account for the requirements of files other than


  ra
  those required by Oracle Applications directly. For example:
    • Operating system software
O   • Online backups

                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 18
     • Custom Applications development files




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 19
 Before Starting Rapid Install




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Stage Area
                                          le
                                       ac
  For a production database install, running Rapid Install from a stage area requires at least 33
  GB to accommodate the file system and database files in the stage area.
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 20
 Create Operating System Accounts (UNIX)




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Create Login Accounts (UNIX)
                                          le
                                       ac
  Single-user installations: To install Oracle Applications in a single-user installation, create an
  oracle user account and log in as this user to run Rapid Install.
                                     r
  Multi-user installations: To install in a multi-user installation, you can assign one user
                                    O ly
  account to be the owner of the database node file system, and another to be the owner of the


                                 l & On
  Applications node file system, by creating an oracle user account and an applmgr user account.



                               na se
     • The operating system user that owns the Oracle database Oracle Home and the Oracle


                             er U
       Applications database is called the oracle user. The oracle user owns the database node
       technology stack (10g R2 ORACLE_HOME), and the database files.


                        I nt
     • The operating system user that owns the Oracle Applications file system is called the

             le
       applmgr user. The applmgr user owns the Applications node technology stack

           c
       (APPL_TOP, COMMON_TOP, 10.1.2 ORACLE_HOME, and 10.1.3 ORACLE HOME).



O ra • Log in as root to run Rapid Install, then specify the oracle user as the owner of the
       database ORACLE_HOME and the applmgr user as the owner of the APPL_TOP.

                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 21
   The multi-account strategy helps to enhance security and auditability.




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 22
 Create Operating System Accounts (Windows)




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Create Login Accounts (Windows)
                                          le
                                       ac
  On Windows platforms, the user who runs Rapid Install owns the file system for all
  components (both the database file system and the Oracle Applications file system). The
                                     r
  Windows installation is equivalent to the UNIX single-user installation.
                                    O ly
  Before you install Oracle Applications, ensure the user account for the installation (the install


                                 l & On
  user) has full local administrative privileges and permission to print to either local or network
  printers. We recommend you create a new account (for example, oracle) on the domain level


                               na se
  and make it a member of these groups:


                             er U
    • Administrators (local user)


                          nt
    • Domain Users (domain user)
  This account does not need to be a member of any other group, and must not be a member of
  the Guest group.      I
             le
  Refer to Windows Help for information on creating accounts and assigning accounts to groups.
           c
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 23
 Set Up Stage Directory




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Set Up a Stage Directory
                                          le
                                       ac
  For optimal performance, run Rapid Install from a stage area. You do this by running a Perl
  script that creates the install directory and copies the contents of the Release 12 software
                                     r
  bundle to a designated location in the file system.
                                    O ly
  The Rapid Install DVDs in the Release 12 software bundle are labeled:


                                 l & On
    • Start Here


                               na se
    • APPL_TOP
    • RDBMS
    • Tools
    • Databases
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 24
 Set Up Stage Directory




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Set Up a Stage Directory
                                          le
                                       ac
  Follow these steps to set up a stage area installation:

                                     r
    1. Log in as a user with enough privilege to mount (and unmount) DVDs, and to write to the
       chosen stage area.
                                    O ly
    2. Insert the Start Here disk in the DVD-ROM drive.

                                 l & On
    3. Mount the DVD (conditional, depending on platform) If your system runs on a UNIX


                               na se
       platform, and if you do not use AutoMount, you must mount the Start Here disk now.
    4. Confirm you have perl 5.0053 installed and in your PATH. (Windows users: the perl

                             er U
       shipped by MKS is not certified. Use ActivePerl, which you can download from


                          nt
       http://perl.com.)

                        I
    5. On UNIX platforms, set the DISPLAY environment variable to an active and authorized
       display.

             le
    6. Run the adautostg.pl script, following these examples and substituting your own paths
           c
       and drive letters as applicable:


O ra               UNIX:
                   $ cd


                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 25
                   $ perl /mnt/dvdrom/Disk1/rapidwiz/adautostg.pl
                   Windows:
                   D:\> perl d:\mnt\dvdrom\Disk1\rapidwiz\adautostg.pl




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 26
 Set Up Stage Directory (cont.)




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Set Up a Stage Directory
                                          le
                                       ac
  Follow these steps to set up a stage area installation:

                                     r
    7. Set up the stage area directory. At the prompt for the stage directory, enter the name of
       the system top-level directory. The Rapid Install Stage12 directory will be created in this
                                    O ly
       path. For example, if you enter /u01 as the top-level directory, the resulting directory path


                                 l & On
       will be /u01/stage12.
    8. Indicate the components to be staged. The script prompts you for the components that

                               na se
       you want to stage. For example, you can indicate that you want to stage only the database


                             er U
       technology stack, only the APPL_TOP, and so on. The default is the first option listed, to
       stage all Oracle Applications components.

                          nt
    9. Install the relevant DVDs, as prompted. A system message lists the files copied and their
                        I
       location in the stage area directory.


           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 27
 Set Up Stage Directory




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Set Up a Stage Directory
                                          le
                                       ac
  The number of disks for each label may vary between platforms.

                                     r
  Installation directories are case-sensitive, and are set up using the capitalization exactly as
  shown.
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 28
 Set Up Stage Directory




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Set Up a Stage Directory
                                          le
                                       ac
  The example in the slide shows a top level directory of Stage12, with subdirectories startCD,
  oraApps, oraDB, oraAS, and oraAppDB..
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 29
 Start Rapid Install from the Stage Area




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 30
 Run Rapid Install from the Disks




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Run Rapid Install from the Disks
                                          le
                                       ac
  Oracle does not recommend running Rapid Install from the DVDs, as the install will take
  longer.
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 31
 Using an Alias for the Host Machine




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Using an Alias for the Host Machine
                                          le
                                       ac
  If you want to use an alias (not the actual name of your host machine), you can use the -
  servername command line option when you start Rapid Install.
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 32
 How an Installation Works




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 How an Installation Works
                                          le
                                       ac
  Rapid Install installs Oracle Applications products by providing a wizard for entering
  information specific to your installation. Once you supply the information required by the
                                     r
  wizard, Rapid Install uses it to install the required Oracle technology stack, create the Oracle
                                    O ly
  Applications file system, configure the services on the application tier, and install and


                                 l & On
  configure the database.
  In a basic installation, all servers and services (database, Concurrent Processing, Forms, and


                               na se
  Web) are installed on a single node (machine). This type of installation is generally used for
  smaller installations or for demonstration purposes. A more typical installation sets up any

                             er U
  combination of servers you specify, on any number of nodes.


                          nt
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 33
 Using the Rapid Install Wizard




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Using the Rapid Install Wizard
                                          le
                                       ac
  The Rapid Install wizard consists of a series of screens where you enter the information Rapid
  Install needs to create your system. This slide outlines the type of information collected by the
  Rapid Install wizard.              r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 34
 Choosing an Installation Environment




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Choosing an Installation Environment
                                          le
                                       ac
  When you set up the instance, you can install a fresh database or a Vision Demonstration
  database.
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 35
 Choosing an Installation Environment




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Choosing an Installation Environment
                                          le
                                       ac
  Rapid Install provides default names that suggest possible uses for the environment: they are
  production (PROD) and Vision Demonstration (VIS).
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 36
 Registering Products and Country-Specific Functionalities




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
 Registering Products and Country-Specific Functionalities


                                       ac
  You use the relevant Rapid Install wizard screens to register licensed products, character sets,
  and country-specific functionalities. During installation, Rapid Install installs all products and
                                     r
  country-specific functionalities in the database and in the file system. Language installations
  require additional language DVDs.
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 37
 Selecting NLS Settings




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Selecting NLS Settings
                                          le
                                       ac
  A new Oracle Applications database installation uses American English (AMERICAN) as the
  base language with US7ASCII as the default character set and a default territory setting of
                                     r
  AMERICA. You can select additional languages and modify the other settings on the Rapid
                                    O ly
  Install wizard screens. Choosing additional languages may require choosing an alternative


                                 l & On
  character set for the database and the APPL_TOP.
  Release 12 provides multilingual support for text parts of Oracle Applications, and for product


                               na se
  data. Because it offers support for the Unicode (UTF8) character set, you can, if required, run a


                             er U
  number of languages in a single instance. You choose the character set for both the database
  and the Applications products when you run Rapid Install.

                          nt
  The Vision Demo database is set up for multiple-organization use, and installed with the UTF8

                        I
  character set. The default character set for a production database is US7ASCII,

             le
  The choice of character sets should be made carefully. It is possible to convert from some

           c
  character sets to others at a later stage, but there are restrictions. For example, you can convert


  ra
  from US7ASCII to UTF8, but not from UTF8 to US7ASCII. The profile options for language
  and territory are configured at the site level when you run Rapid Install. The language you

O
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 38
   choose as the base language is used for the language profile. The default settings for date and
   number formats are derived from the territory profile setting.




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 39
 Selecting Configuration Parameters




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 40
 Validating Configuration Parameters




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Validating Configuration Parameters
                                          le
                                       ac
  Once you have indicated the parameters for your installation, Rapid Install performs a series of
  system validation checks and notifies you of the results.
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 41
 Running Rapid Install




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Running Rapid Install
                                          le
                                       ac
  When you are sure the configuration parameters are correct, let Rapid Install complete the
  installation. When the process completes, you may need to perform additional finishing or
  implementation steps.              r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 42
 Restarting the Installation




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Restarting the Installation
                                          le
                                       ac
  The configuration file, conf_<SID>.txt, plays an important role in restarts. It is stored in the
  operating system's temporary directory, and utilized if the user wishes to restart an install in
                                     r
  which Rapid Install did not get as far as creating the database.
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 43
 Configuration File




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Configuration File
                                          le
                                       ac
  The configuration file, conf_<SID>.txt, plays an important role in restarts. It is stored in the
  operating system's temporary directory, and utilized if the user wishes to restart an install in
                                     r
  which Rapid Install did not get as far as creating the database.
                                    O ly
  If you are installing in an environment where different machines are used to support the


                                 l & On
  database and application tiers (as is typically the case), you run Rapid Install on each machine
  in turn, starting with the database machine. For example, if you have a machine for the


                               na se
  database tier and two more for the application tier, you would run Rapid Install once on each


                             er U
  machine, i.e. a total of three times.



                        I nt
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 44
 Rapid Install Log Files




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Rapid Install Log Files
                                          le
                                       ac
  The default value for context_name is <SID>_<host_name>

                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 45
 Rapid Install Help




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 46
 Module Summary




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 47
 Module Discussion




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 48
 Module Practice




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 49
 Practice - Performing Preliminary Installation Tasks
 Overview
 In this practice, you set up your environment for an installation of Oracle Applications Release
 12.

 Tasks
 1. Read the latest Oracle Applications Release Notes for Release 12.

 2. Verify system resources.

 3. Create accounts. The user may have already been created for you.

 4. Create mount points or base locations for the installation.

 5. Stage the Rapid Install DVDs.

      Note: For most classroom environments, steps 2-5 will have been completed for you.



                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 50
 Solution - Performing Preliminary Installation Tasks
 1. Read the latest Oracle Applications Release Notes for Release 12. These are available for
    Linux on OracleMetaLink, as Note 402310.1.

 2. Verify system resources.
    Verify that you have sufficient disk space to perform the installation. You will need a total of
    approximately 160GB of free space for a fresh install.

 3. Create accounts. The user may have already been created for you.

      If you are installing on UNIX, create a single account that will own the Oracle Applications
      technology stack files, the Oracle Applications files, and the Oracle database.

 4. Create a top-level directory (such as /d01/oracle) to use as the top-level directory for the
    installation. The apps, db and inst directories and their subdirectories will be created under
    this directory.

 5. Stage the Rapid Install DVDs.

      •    Load Disk 1 (Start Here DVD) in the DVD drive.

      •    Run the adautostg.pl script.
                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                     de
           $ cd /mnt/dvdrom/Disk1/rapidwiz
           $ perl adautostg.pl

      Note: For most classroom environments, steps 2-5 will have been completed for you.
                                                                                                  ca
                                                                                                A
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 51
                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Preparing for Your Installation
                                                  Chapter 2 - Page 52
                                                        Performing an Installation
                                                        Chapter 3



                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 1
                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 2
 Performing an Installation




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 3
 Objectives




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Objectives
                                          le
                                       ac
  This module covers the steps needed to perform both a standard and an Express installation of
  Oracle Applications. Detailed coverage is given of the Rapid Install screens that are used to
                                     r
  provide the information needed to install and configure the system.
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 4
 Module Overview




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Overview
                                          le
                                       ac
  This module describes the steps involved in performing a standard installation.

                                     r
  A standard installation may be on a single machine (node), which is the easiest installation to
  perform, or it may be on multiple machines. There are two main parts to an installation:
                                    O ly
    • Create and save a configuration by accepting the default values or supplying your own

                                 l & On
       configuration values.


                               na se
    • Once your configuration has been created, the installation process uses that information to:
         - Create the technology stack components

                             er U
         - Install all Oracle Applications product files


                          nt
         - Register the products you choose to use

                        I
         - Create the Oracle Applications database

             le
         - Create and configure the additional required services, such as Forms and Web

           c
           services



O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 5
 Module Overview




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Overview (cont.)
                                          le
                                       ac
   After the installation is complete, the module examines the post-installation tests that are
      carried out and describes how to connect to Oracle Applications.
                                     r
   The module concludes by describing the simpler Express installation, and how it differs from
      a standard installation.      O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 6
 Basic Installation Procedure




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Basic Installation Procedure
                                          le
                                       ac
  All installations fundamentally include carrying out preliminary tasks, supplying values for
  various parameters or accepting defaults, running the Rapid Install wizard, and performing
  post-installation tasks.           r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                               Chapter 3 - Page 7
 Simplest Installation




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Simple Installation
                                          le
                                       ac
  In the simplest type of installation, all Applications components are installed on the same
  machine (node).
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                               Chapter 3 - Page 8
 More Typical Installation




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Multi-Node Installation
                                          le
                                       ac
  Application tier processing can be distributed across multiple Applications nodes. It is also
  possible to add further application nodes to scale up the application tier. Typically, the
                                     r
  additional nodes will be located on their own machines, to help increase availability and
  flexibility of the system.
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
  To facilitate this, and make overall administration easier, Release 12 does not separate the
  different APPL_TOP components (such as Concurrent Processing, Forms, and Web), as was


                               na se
  done in previous releases. In the Release 12 Unified APPL_TOP, the same files are present on


                             er U
  each application node. The difference between application nodes depends on the service groups
  that are activated on each node.


                        I nt
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 9
 Standard Installation Steps




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Standard Installation Steps
                                          le
                                       ac
  You carry out installation of Oracle E-Business Suite with the Rapid Install wizard. This and
  the next slide outline the necessary configuration steps before starting the installation.
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 10
 Standard Installation Steps




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Standard Installation Steps
                                          le
                                       ac
  You carry out installation of Oracle E-Business Suite with the Rapid Install wizard.

                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 11
 Standard Installation Steps




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Standard Installation Steps
                                          le
                                       ac
  You carry out an installation of Oracle E-Business Suite with the Rapid Install wizard.

                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 12
 Step 1 Start the Rapid Install Wizard




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Start the Rapid Install Wizard
                                          le
                                       ac
  Start the wizard from the command line by entering ./rapidwiz at the prompt. The
  Welcome screen appears.
                                     r
  This screen lists the components that are included in, or supported by, this release of Oracle
                                    O ly
  Applications. Use the scroll bar to bring all the components into view. Notice that a new


                                 l & On
  installation contains a fresh Oracle10g (10.2.0.2) database.
  This screen is for information only. No action is required. Click Next to continue.

                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 13
 Step 2 Select a Wizard Operation




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Select a wizard operation
                                          le
                                       ac
  Use the Select Wizard Operation screen to indicate the action you want Rapid Install to
  perform. You begin both new installations and upgrades from this screen. Based on the action
                                     r
  you choose, the Rapid Install wizard continues with the appropriate screen.
                                    O ly
  The available actions are as follows:


                                 l & On
    • Install Oracle Applications Release12
       This action sets up a new, fully configured system, with either a fresh database or a Vision

                               na se
       Demo database. The configuration is derived from the parameters you enter.


                             er U
         - Use Express Install


                          nt
           This option sets up a fully configured, single-user system with either a fresh database
           or Vision Demo database. You supply a few basic parameters, such as database type
                        I
           and name. The remaining directories and mount points are supplied by Rapid Install.

             le
    • Upgrade to Oracle Applications Release 12

           c
       Choose this option to indicate that you are upgrading your E-Business Suite products. The



O ra   wizard screen flow presents two paths: one that lays down the file system and installs the
       new technology stack, and one that configures servers and starts services. The Upgrade
       Actions are used when upgrading a Release 11i system to Release 12.

                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 14
   Select Install Oracle Applications release 12, then click Next to continue.




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 15
 Step 3 Oracle Configuration Manager




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Oracle Configuration Manager
                                          le
                                       ac
  Oracle Connection Manager (OCM) is an optional component that is designed to facilitate
  support for your Oracle products. The initial OCM screen appears as part of a Rapid Install
                                     r
  run. You must click on either Accept or Decline to proceed or not proceed with deploying
  OCM.
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
  A lightweight agent that consumes minimal CPU resources, OCM tracks key Oracle and
  system statistics of the machine on which it is running, to help reduce the time needed for


                               na se
  resolution of support issues. Data collected by OCM is sent securely via HTTPS to Oracle


                             er U
  Support, who can thereby maintain an up-to-date view of your Oracle instance.
  Use of Oracle Configuration Manager is optional, but recommended. If you choose Decline,

                          nt
  you simply continue your Rapid Install run.

                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 16
 Step 3 Oracle Configuration Manager




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Oracle Configuration Manager
                                          le
                                       ac
  If you choose the Oracle-recommended option of Accept, you are presented with another OCM
  screen. On this screen, you are required to enter your Customer Support Identifier (CSI), your
                                     r
  OracleMetaLink account details, and your country.
                                    O ly
  Optionally, you can enable use of a proxy server with Oracle Configuration Manager. If you


                                 l & On
  choose to do so, you must specify the server name and port number you want to use.



                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 17
 Step 4 Configuration Choice




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Configuration Choice
                                          le
                                       ac
  On the Configuration Choice screen, you indicate whether you will be using an existing
  configuration.
                                     r
  If you choose Create a new configuration , Rapid Install saves the configuration parameters
                                    O ly
  you enter on the wizard screens in the Applications database, and in a configuration file


                                 l & On
  (conf_<SID>.txt), which is stored in your system temporary directory until the installation is
  completed.


                               na se
  If you choose Load the following saved configuration, the database connect string field


                             er U
  becomes active. For a configuration stored in the database, this field is made up of
  <hostname>:<SID>:<database port>; for example, appserv2.company.com:VIS:1521 (the host

                          nt
  name must include the domain).

                        I
  Enter the appropriate database connect string (or conf_<SID>.txt file location, if applicable) to

             le
  point Rapid Install to a stored configuration whose parameters you wish to use. Typically, you

           c
  would choose this option when performing a multi-node install, or when restarting Rapid


  ra
  Install after an interruption to the installation process.


O
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 18
 Step 5 Global System Settings




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Global System Settings
                                          le
                                       ac
  On the Global System Settings screen, you indicate whether you want to accept the default port
  values. You can specify a port pool setting to enable multiple Applications environments to co-
                                     r
  exist on the same machine. For example, if you select an increment of 3 from the Port Pool list,
                                    O ly
  the values in the Derived Port Settings will reflect this choice. Use the scroll bar or click


                                 l & On
  Advanced Edit to see the Port Values screen.
  The default value of the Port Pool set is zero, but you can customize it by selecting another


                               na se
  value from the drop-down list in the Port Pool field. There are 100 port pool selections: if you


                             er U
  select an increment of 3, the default values are increased by that value. The Database Port
  (1521) becomes 1524, the RPC Port (1626) becomes 1629, and so on.

                          nt
  At this point, you can simply accept the values for the chosen Port Pool (and therefore

                        I
  individual ports) by clicking Next. This will suffice for many installations. Otherwise, you can

             le
  click on the Edit Ports button to open a screen (shown on the next slide) that allows you to
  specify the values of any ports you wish.
           c
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 19
 Step 5: Global System Settings




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Global System Settings
                                          le
                                       ac
  This screen allows you to specify individual port values to meet particular site-specific
  requirements, over and above the basic use of the Port Pool mechanism described on the
                                     r
  previous slide. For example, you might wish to avoid using a particular port for some reason,
                                    O ly
  perhaps because it will be needed by some other software.


                                 l & On
  When finished on this screen, click OK to return to the Global System Settings screen, and
  click Next on that screen.


                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 20
 Step 6 Database Node Configuration




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Define Database Node
                                          le
                                       ac
  On the Database Node Configuration screen, indicate the kind of database you want to install
  in the new system, the name you will use to identify it, the machine on which it will run, and
  that machine's domain name.        r
                                    O ly
  You then need to confirm the operating system shown on the drop-down list is correct, specify


                                 l & On
  the Oracle user's operating system account name and group, and finally specify the base
  directory under which the installation is to take place.


                               na se
  You can install either a fresh database or a Vision Demo database.


                             er U
  • A fresh database is fully configured and ready to be used for a new implementation. This


                          nt
  type of database is suitable for any type of system that requires a fresh database, such as a
  production system or test system. The default name for a production database is PROD. If you
                        I
  are installing a database for another use, for example as a test system or a backup system,

             le
  choose the Fresh Database option and enter a database name that reflects its purpose, for

           c
  example TEST.



O ra
  • A Vision Demo database is used for demonstration or training purposes. It contains a fully
  configured Oracle Applications system that has been populated with a set of transactions for a


                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 21
   fictitious company. The Vision Demo database is set up for multiple-organization use, and
   installed with the UTF8 character set. The default database name is VIS.




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 22
 Step 6 Database Node Configuration




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Define Database Node
                                          le
                                       ac
  In this example, the Database Type drop-down list has been used to select a Vision Demo
  Database. Accept the default database name (VIS), or type in another name (alphanumeric, not
                                     r
  to exceed 8 characters in length, with no spaces) for the local instance. This name is often
  referred to as the database SID.
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
  The Database OS User is the account that will own the database technology stack and file
  system. Enter the name of the Database OS Group (dba). The Database OS User may belong to


                               na se
  other groups, but it must belong to this group.


                             er U
  The Base directory defaults to a sample directory name, using the operating system syntax for
  the machine where you started the Rapid Install wizard. This directory is the top-level

                          nt
  directory that Rapid Install uses to derive the mount. This is shown on the next slide.

                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 23
 Step 7 Database Directory




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Choose Database Directory
                                          le
                                       ac
  On this screen, click on a suitable folder, or type a path in the Directory field. Click OK to
  confirm your choice and return to the Database Node Configuration screen, or click Cancel to
  return without making a selection. r
                                    O ly
  After returning to the parent screen, then click Next to continue with the install.


                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 24
 Step 8 Select Licensing Type




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Select Licensing Type
                                          le
                                       ac
  When installing a fresh database (not a Vision demo database), the wizard prompts you to
  indicate the type of licensing agreement you have purchased from Oracle. It then presents the
  appropriate licensing screen.      r
                                    O ly
  Note: Completing a licensing screen simply registers your products as active, and does not


                                 l & On
  constitute a licensing agreement.
  Rapid Install installs all products, including shared and dependent products, regardless of their

                               na se
  licensed status. However, you must register products you have licensed so that they are flagged


                             er U
  in the system as active. An active flag marks products for inclusion in patching and other tasks
  that you will perform to update and maintain your system after the initial installation.

                          nt
  You can register products using either the Suite License Model or the Component License
                        I
  Model. Complete whichever one of these matches your licensing agreement.

             le
  If you choose the Suite licensing option on the Suite Selection screen, the Licensing Page for

           c
  that option appears, as shown on the next slide.



O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 25
 Step 9 License Additional Products




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Suite Licensing Model
                                          le
                                       ac
  The Suite Licensing Model allows wide access to Applications functionality. By choosing it,
  you tell Rapid Install to automatically register all products included in the Applications price
                                     r
  bundle. The products that are checked and grayed are licensed automatically as a part of the
                                    O ly
  suite. The ones that are not must be registered separately as additional products — they are not


                                 l & On
  part of the E-Business Suite price bundle. If you have licensed any additional products and
  want to register them, place a check mark in the relevant boxes.


                               na se
  If you clicked the Component licensing option on the Suite Selection screen, the Licensing


                             er U
  Page for that option appears, and is shown on the next slide.



                        I nt
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 26
 Step 10 License Products




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Product Licensing Model
                                          le
                                       ac
  Choose this option if your licensing agreement is for individual Applications component
  products. These products are licensed based on the number of authorized users or on the
                                     r
  number of business transactions processed. All individual products are listed on this screen.
                                    O ly
  Products that are grayed out cannot be selected unless the "parent" component is selected.


                                 l & On
  You can register additional products after the initial installation, by using the License Manager
  component of Oracle Applications Manager.


                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 27
 Step 11 Select Country-Specific Functionality




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Select Country-Specific Functionality
                                          le
                                       ac
  Some systems require the country-specific functionality of a localized Applications product.
  For example, if your company operates in Canada, products such as Human Resources require
                                     r
  additional features to accommodate the Canadian labor laws and codes that differ from those in
                                    O ly
  the United States. You register the name of the region associated with the localized product on


                                 l & On
  the Select Country-specific Functionalities screen.
  If your company operates only in the United States, you can bypass this screen. If you begin


                               na se
  doing business in another country at a later date, you can use License Manager to register the


                             er U
  associated region at any time after the original installation or upgrade.
  All the country-specific functionalities that Oracle supports are listed on this screen, arranged

                          nt
  alphabetically. Double-click a region in the Available Regions box to move it into the Selected

                        I
  Regions box or highlight it and click the right arrow (>). To deselect a region, highlight it and

             le
  double-click or click the left arrow (<) to remove it from the Selected Regions box.

           c
  For example, if you select Canada, the screen would look as shown on the following slide.



O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 28
 Step 11 Select Country-Specific Functionality




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Select Country-Specific Functionality
                                          le
                                       ac
  As well as using the single arrows to select or deselect individual countries, you can use the
  double arrows to select or deselect all the countries.
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 29
 Step 12 Select Internationalization Settings




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Select Internationalization Settings
                                          le
                                       ac
  American English is the only language installed in your system by default: you cannot remove
  it from the Selected Languages box. However, Oracle Applications also supports numerous
                                     r
  other languages. The languages you select help determine the available options for the other
                                    O ly
  NLS-related configuration parameters (such as territory and character set) that your system


                                 l & On
  requires and can support.
  You can double-click a language in the Available Languages box to move it into the Selected


                               na se
  Languages box, or highlight it and click the right arrow (>). Conversely, you can highlight a


                             er U
  language in the Selected Languages box and click the left arrow (<) to remove it. Point 1 on the
  slide shows Canadian French selected as an additional language. To select or deselect all

                          nt
  languages in a single action, you can use the double arrows, >> or <<.

                        I
  After the initial Release 12 installation is complete, additional languages can be installed and

             le
  then activated using License Manager (part of Oracle Applications Manager).

           c
  The NLS language and territory settings are stored as profile options in the database. They are


  ra
  configured at the site level when you run Rapid Install. The base language is used for the
  default language setting and the default territory is used for the territory profile option. Users

O inherit these values the first time they log on to Oracle Applications.

                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 30
 Step 12 Select Internationalization Settings




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
                                          le
 Select Internationalization Settings (cont.)


                                       ac
  The base language defaults to American English. If you choose additional languages on the
  Select Additional Languages screen, they appear in the Selected Languages box.
                                     r
  Rapid Install does not set RDBMS date and numeric formats during installation. It uses default
                                    O ly
  formats based on the territory profile setting (as derived from NLS_LANG). The Default


                                 l & On
  Territory is AMERICA at the site level (Point 2 on the slide).
  The "Database character set" (Point 3 on the slide) and the "APPL_TOP character set" (Point

                               na se
  4) drop-down menus initially show US7ASCII as the default character set. Other compatible


                             er U
  character sets are listed as well.


                          nt
  UTF8 is the default character set for the Vision Demo database and the APPL_TOP. You
  cannot convert either of these character sets. Because in this example you selected Canadian
                        I
  French as an additional language, the character set choices have changed, and now include

             le
  only those that are compatible with both American English and Canadian French.

           c
  If you want to change the character set in either the database or the APPL_TOP, select a new



O ra
  value from the drop-down list. Any languages you plan to install after Rapid Install is complete
  must be compatible with the character set of your Applications system.
  The IANA character set (Point 5) is the standard character set name used by the Web services.

                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 31
 Step 13 Primary Applications Node Configuration (UNIX)




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Define Primary Applications Node
                                          le
                                       ac
  You have specified the top-level directory for the RDBMS. Now you must specify top-level
  directory and subdirectories associated with the Applications nodes.
                                     r
  The default sample directories use the syntax of the operating system where you started Rapid
                                    O ly
  Install. In addition, some of the fields are operating system-specific. The above example shows


                                 l & On
  this screen for a Linux system, where you need to complete the information for Apps OS User
  (the account that owns the Applications tier file system and technology stack) and Apps OS


                               na se
  Group (the group to which the Apps OS User belongs). Accept the defaults, or enter new


                             er U
  values.
  The Base directory is the top-level directory that Rapid Install will use to derive the mount

                          nt
  points for the Applications nodes. You can accept the default or enter a new value.

                        I
  The Instance directory (new in Release 12) stores instance-specific files, including runtime

             le
  generated files, log files, and configuration files. It can be a local directory (for better access

           c
  speed). It does not have to be in a shared location.



O ra
  Clicking the Edit Services button enables you to choose which services are enabled on this
  Applications node.


                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 32
 Step 13 Primary Applications Node Configuration (Windows)




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Primary Applications Node (Windows)
                                          le
                                       ac
  The UNIX Toolkit directory and Visual Studio directories are specific to Windows. Enter the
  appropriate values in these fields, or accept the defaults if applicable.
                                     r
  The Base directory is the top-level directory that Rapid Install will use to derive the mount
                                    O ly
  points for the Applications nodes. You can accept the default or enter a new value.


                                 l & On
  Clicking the Edit Services button enables you to choose which services are enabled on this
  Applications node.

                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 33
 Step 14 Primary Applications Node Services




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Primary Applications Node Services
                                          le
                                       ac
  The application node services define the set of processes that will be started on each
  Applications node. In Release 12, all the APPL_TOPs on a multi-node system contain the
                                     r
  same files. This is a change from Release 11i, where a role would have files installed according
                                    O ly
  to the function it was to serve. In Release 12, there is no concept of a "Forms node", "Web


                                 l & On
  node", and so on, as there is no association between installed files and the services that can be
  run on that machine. The node’s role is defined by the activated services instead.


                               na se
  The services are divided into the following categories, which differs significantly from the


                             er U
  Release 11i model, and also uses new terminology:
    • Root Service

                          nt
    • Web Entry Point Services
                        I
    • Web Application Services

             le
    • Batch Processing Services
           c
    • Other Service Group


O ra
  At present, Root Service, Web Entry Point Services, and Web Application Services must all be
  installed on the same node.

                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 34
   These services will be discussed in more detail later in the course.




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                               Chapter 3 - Page 35
 Step 14 Primary Applications Node Services




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Primary Applications Node Services
                                          le
                                       ac
  Applications nodes should have services enabled as follows:

                                     r
  For Web and Forms services: Root Service, Web Entry Point Services, Web Application
  Services, and Other Service Group
                                    O ly
  For Concurrent Processing services: Batch Processing Services

                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 36
 Step 14 Primary Applications Node Services




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Primary Applications Node Services
                                          le
                                       ac
  As an example, consider a two-node installation where you wish to deploy the database and
  Concurrent Processing services on Server A, and Web and Forms services on Server B.
                                     r
  • On Server A, you would select Batch Processing Services.
                                    O ly
  • On Server B, you would select Root Service, Web Entry Point Services, Web Application

                                 l & On
  Services, and Other Service Group.


                               na se
  In terms of ORACLE_HOME creation, the result will be that:
  • Server A has an ORACLE_HOME for the 10g Applications database, an ORACLE_HOME

                             er U
  for Application Server 10.1.2, and an ORACLE_HOME for Application Server 10.1.3.


                          nt
  • Server B has an ORACLE_HOME for Application Server 10.1.2, and an ORACLE_HOME

                        I
  for Application Server 10.1.3.



           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 37
 Step 15 Primary Applications Node Directories




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Primary Applications Node Paths
                                          le
                                       ac
  You can use the Browse button to navigate to a new directory path for each category, and
  double-click the path to select it.
                                     r
  After specifying suitable values to suit your site, click Next to continue.
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 38
 Step 16 Review Node Information




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Review Information for All Nodes
                                          le
                                       ac
  At this stage, you have specified details for the database node and the primary Applications
  node. For simple environments, you may only want a single Applications node, in which case
                                     r
  you simply click Next to bypass the next step.
                                    O ly
  If you want to specify details for additional Applications nodes, proceed to the step shown on


                                 l & On
  the next slide.



                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 39
 Step 17 Additional Applications Node




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Configure Additional Applications Node
                                          le
                                       ac
  Here, you specify details of the first additional Applications node. You can either accept the
  defaults and suggested values, or edit them as needed. The buttons on this screen fulfill the
                                     r
  same roles as their counterparts on the Primary Applications Node screen. The Browse button
                                    O ly
  allows you to search the file system for a suitable location to use as the Base directory. The


                                 l & On
  Edit Paths button opens a window where you can specify a new value for one or more of the
  Applications node paths. Clicking the Edit Services button enables you to choose which


                               na se
  services are enabled on this Applications node.


                             er U
  An additional feature on this screen is the Shared Filesystem checkbox and associated drop-
  down list. By checking the box and selecting a node from the existing Applications nodes that

                          nt
  appear on the drop-down list, you enable the node being added on this screen to share the

                        I
  Applications tier file system with the node selected from the drop-down list.



           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 40
 Step 18 Shared Applications Node




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Configure Shared Applications Node
                                          le
                                       ac
  This slide shows the addition of a second Applications node, testsrv3, which shares its file
  system with an existing Applications node, testsrv2.
                                     r
  When you have finished providing details for the first additional Applications node, click OK
                                    O ly
  to return to the Primary Applications Node screen. If you want to add further Applications


                                 l & On
  nodes, click on Add Server again (see two slides previously, slide entitled Review Node
  Information) and repeat the process.


                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 41
 Step 19 Review Additional Applications Nodes




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Review Additional Applications Nodes
                                          le
                                       ac
  This slide shows the result of adding a total of two further Applications nodes, over and above
  the Primary Applications node.
                                     r
  Two additional actions are available for the new Applications nodes: the icons to their left
                                    O ly
  enable you to edit their details and delete them, respectively. If you click on the wastebasket


                                 l & On
  icon to delete a node, a popup window appears to request confirmation. You cannot delete
  either the Database Node or the Primary Applications node.


                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 42
 Step 20 Review Pre-Install Tests




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
 Review Pre-Install Tests – Port Availability


                                       ac
  The System Check Status screen lists the results of checking port availability.

                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 43
 Step 20 Review Pre-Install Tests




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Review Pre-Install Tests
                                          le
                                       ac
  Rapid Install now performs a series of system tests to validate the configuration described in
  the configuration file. On the Pre-Install Checks screen it lists the tests performed and marks
                                     r
  each one with an indication of whether it succeeded or failed.
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 44
 Step 20 Review Pre-Install Tests




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Pre-Install Tests
                                          le
                                       ac
  The results of each test are labeled with icons. There are three possible results of a test:
    • Check (tick) mark
                                     r
       The test succeeded. Click the mark to get details of the test performed.
    • Exclamation mark (!)          O ly
                                 l & On
       The configuration requires review. Click the ! to get information about the system test
       review. Click Yes to continue, or No if you are going to resolve the issues. Rapid Install

                               na se
       displays an alert if you continue without resolving the issues.


                             er U
    • An x mark


                          nt
       All issues marked x must be resolved before you continue with the installation. Click the x
       to see the errors. If you can resolve an issue by altering the values provided on one of the
                        I
       wizard screens, click Back until you reach the appropriate screen, and re-enter the values.

             le
       Some tests must be resolved in the operating system. In that case, you may have to restart

           c
       the Rapid Install wizard after the problem has been fixed.



O ra
  The following slide discusses the tests in more detail.



                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 45
 Step 20 Review Pre-Install Tests




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Parameter Validation
                                          le
                                       ac
  The parameters that Rapid Install validates include:

                                     r
    • Port Availability validates the ports you selected are available for use

                                    O ly
    • OS User and Group indicates whether the OS user account and group exist, and the user
      account is a member of the group

                                 l & On
    • Port Uniqueness validates that there are no duplicate defined ports for server processes


                               na se
    • File System validates that file system mount points exist and have correct privileges
    • File Space validates that file system mount points have sufficient free space

                             er U
    • Host/Domain validates the host and domain names

                          nt
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 46
 Step 21 Review Setup Portion




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Review Setup Portion
                                          le
                                       ac
  On the Component Installation Review screen, Rapid Install lists the components it will install,
  based on the system parameters you entered in the wizard. Click Next.
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 47
 Step 22 Start the Installation




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Start the Installation
                                          le
                                       ac
  Click Yes to begin the installation.

                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 48
 Step 23 Monitor Status Indicators and Prompts




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Monitor Status Indicators and Prompts
                                          le
                                       ac
  During an installation, Rapid Install displays a main progress bar and an individual progress
  bar. The main progress bar reports on the completion percentage of the installation as a whole.
                                     r
  The individual progress bar reports on the progress of each individual step. The installation is
                                    O ly
  not complete until all the progress bars disappear from your screen.


                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 49
 Restart the Installation (only if required)




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
 Restart the Installation (only if required)


                                       ac
  If the installation process terminates abnormally before completion, you can restart it and carry
  on, after correcting any problems.
  1. Re-run the Rapid Install wizard r
                                    O ly
  This time, add the -restart option to the rapidwiz command. When the initial Rapid Install

                                 l & On
  screen appears, select the same operation you chose originally, then click Next.


                               na se
  Rapid Install has stored the configuration in the Applications database (or conf_<SID>.txt file),
  so choose "Load the following saved configuration". This avoids having to complete the


                             er U
  wizard screens a second time. After accepting or specifying the configuration details, click


                          nt
  Next.
  2. Continue with the install
                        I
  Rapid Install moves through the installed components and automatically starts at the point

             le
  where it previously stopped. Previously completed actions start and complete rapidly as the
           c
  wizard determines that there is nothing additional to do.


O ra
  You may see validation warnings (for example, port already in use) if your database was
  already installed before the restart process. You can safely ignore these messages.


                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 50
 Step 24 Review Post-Installation Tests




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Review Post-installation Tests
                                          le
                                       ac
  After the installation is complete, Rapid Install automatically validates the installed
  Applications environments. Tests include database availability, correctly configured
                                     r
  environment files, and functioning listeners.
                                    O ly
  Post-installation tests include the following:


                                 l & On
  Database Availability           Database is running and allows users to log on


                               na se
  Environment File                Environment file has been delivered
  HTTP                            HTTP listener is working
  Login Page
  DBC File
                          nt er U Login Page is working
                                  DBC file has been created
  JSP
                        I         JavaServer pages are working

             le
  Review the information from the tests Rapid Install has completed If there is an ! or x icon,

           c
  click it to see the details. If any of the checks fail, refer to the Rapid Install log files to

  ra
  determine the reason, and resolve each problem before continuing. When the errors are fixed,
  click Retry to perform the post-install validation again.

O Click Next if there are no errors.

                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 51
 Step 25 Review Components Installed




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Review Components Installed
                                          le
                                       ac
  On the Finish screen, Rapid Install shows you the components that it installed.

                                     r
  If you wish to review the Post-install Checks screen, click Back.

                                    O ly
  Otherwise, you can log in to Oracle Applications by clicking Connect to Oracle Applications
  12, or exit the Rapid Install session by clicking Finish.

                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 52
 Express Installation




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Express Installation
                                          le
                                       ac
  An Express installation sets up a fully configured single-user/single-machine system with
  either a fresh database or Vision Demo database. You specify basic configuration parameters,
                                     r
  such as database type and name, top-level installation directory, and port increments. The
                                    O ly
  remaining directories and mount points are supplied by Rapid Install using default values.


                                 l & On
  This type of installation contains (by default) a set of core Applications products. It also
  contains the US7ASCII character set (for a fresh install) and the UTF8 character set (for a


                               na se
  Vision Demo install), in both the database and the APPL_TOP.


                             er U
  You can easily register additional products (according to your Oracle licensing agreement)
  after the installation is complete, by using License Manager.

                          nt
  Note: Converting the character set may be time-consuming, and is best avoided if possible.
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 53
 Express Installation




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Express Installation
                                          le
                                       ac
  The key difference between an Express installation and a standard installation is that with the
  Express type, default values are supplied for most parameters.
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 54
 Step 1 Start Rapid Install Wizard




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Start Rapid Install Wizard
                                          le
                                       ac
  Start the wizard from the command line by entering ./rapidwiz at the prompt. The
  Welcome screen appears.
                                     r
  This screen lists the components that are included in, or supported by, this release of Oracle
                                    O ly
  Applications. Use the scroll bar to bring all the components into view. Notice that a new


                                 l & On
  installation contains a fresh Oracle10g (10.2.0.2) database.
  This screen is for information only. No action is required. Click Next to continue.

                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 55
 Step 2 Select Express installation




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Select Express installation
                                          le
                                       ac
  Start Rapid Install. On the Select Wizard Operation screen, click Install Oracle Applications
  Release 12, and also check Use Express Configuration.
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 56
 Step 3 Oracle Configuration Manager




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Oracle Configuration Manager
                                          le
                                       ac
  Oracle Connection Manager (OCM) is an optional component that is designed to facilitate
  support for your Oracle products. The initial OCM screen appears as part of a Rapid Install
                                     r
  run. You must click on either Accept or Decline to proceed or not proceed with deploying
  OCM.
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
  OCM provides continuous tracking of key Oracle and system statistics of the machine it is
  running on. Data collected by OCM is sent via HTTPS (secure) to Oracle Support, who can


                               na se
  thereby maintain an updated view of your Oracle instance.


                             er U
  Use of Oracle Configuration Manager is optional, but recommended. If you choose Decline,
  you simply continue your Rapid Install run.


                        I nt
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 57
 Step 3 Oracle Configuration Manager




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
 Oracle Configuration Manager
                                          le
                                       ac
  If you choose the Oracle-recommended option of Accept, you are presented with another OCM
  screen. On this screen, you are required to enter your Customer Support Identifier (CSI), your
                                     r
  OracleMetaLink account details, and your country.
                                    O ly
  Optionally, you can enable use of a proxy server with Oracle Configuration Manager. If you


                                 l & On
  choose to do so, you must specify the server name and port number you want to use.



                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 58
 Step 4 Configuration Choices




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Enter Configuration Values
                                          le
                                       ac
  The Express Configuration Information screen prompts for basic configuration values.

                                     r
    • In the Database Type field, use the drop-down list to choose either a Vision Demo
      database or a fresh database, and then either accept VIS or enter another name in the
      Database SID field.           O ly
                                 l & On
    • On Windows (as shown in the example on the slide), enter the path to the UNIX Toolkit
      directory and Visual Studio directory, or click Browse and navigate to the desired path for
      each of these.
                               na se
                             er U
    • On UNIX systems, set the DISPLAY environment variable to an active and authorized


                          nt
      display.
    • Enter a valid domain name. This value, when combined with a host (machine) name, must
                        I
      produce a fully qualified domain name. For example, a host name of apps1 and domain

             le
      name of company.com make up an FQDN of apps1.company.com.

           c
    • In the Base Directory field, enter the top-level directory path you want Rapid Install to use


O ra  to create the derived mount points for the database node and all Applications nodes.
      Alternatively, click Browse and navigate to the desired path.
    • Select a Port Pool, or accept the default.

                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 59
 Step 5 Review Pre-Install Tests




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Review Pre-Install Tests
                                          le
                                       ac
  Rapid Install performs a series of system tests to validate the configuration described in the
  configuration file. On the Pre-Install Checks screen it lists the tests performed and marks each
                                     r
  one with an indication of whether it succeeded or failed.
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 60
 Correct Any Problems




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Correct Any Problems
                                          le
                                       ac
  As described in the earlier section on standard (non-Express) installation, you must correct any
  problems highlighted by the pre-install tests. If there is an exclamation mark (!) or x icon
                                     r
  shown, click on it to see the details stored during the check process.
                                    O ly
  The screen on the slide is an example of what you might see if you click on an exclamation


                                 l & On
  mark beside File Space Check.



                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 61
 Step 6 Perform the Installation




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Carry Out the Express Install
                                          le
                                       ac
  The remainder of an Express Install is the same as for a standard install.

                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 62
 Module Summary




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 63
 Module Discussion




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 64
 Module Practice




                                                                                                  m y
                                                                                              a de
                                                                                           A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                              Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                             Chapter 3 - Page 65
 Practice - Performing a Standard Installation
 Overview
 In this practice, you run Rapid Install to install a standard Oracle Applications system.

 Tasks
 1. Change to the rapidwiz directory of the StartCD stage area and start the Rapid Install wizard
    by entering the command rapidwiz at the prompt.

 2. Choose a wizard operation.

 3. Respond to Oracle Configuration Manager prompts.

 4. Choose whether to create a new configuration or load an existing one.

 5. Specify Global System Settings.

 6. Define database node configuration.

      a) Identify the type of database by selecting the appropriate entry from the drop-down list.
         Select the Fresh database option (not the Vision demo database).
                                                                                                     m y
      b) Supply a name for your database (provided by your instructor).

                                                                                                 a de
 7. Set up database installation directory.
    Your instructor will provide you with the directory location.
                                                                                              A c
 8. Select product license type.
                                          le
                                       ac
 9. Select country-specific functionality.
                                     r
    View the available localized regions. Do not select a country-specific functionality at present.

 10. Select Additional languages.   O ly
                                 l & On
     View the lanaguages available. Do not select any additional languages at present.


                               na se
 11. Select the Internationalization settings. The default base language, territory, and character


                             er U
     sets are shown.


                          nt
      a) Select the base language.

               •        I
                    American_English-US


           c le
      b) Select the territory.



O ra           •    America


                                 Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                                Chapter 3 - Page 66
      c) Select the database character set. The drop-down list shows the supported character sets
         for the languages you have selected.

               •    UTF8

      d) Select the APPL_TOP character set.

               •    UTF8

 12. Enter primary applications node details. Having specified the top-level directory for the
     database, you now specify the top-level directory and subdirectories associated with the
     application tier nodes.

     Your instructor will provide you with the mount point location for the base directory.

 13. Use the Edit Services button to screen to choose which services are enabled on this
     Applications node. Categories are Root Services, Web Entry Point Services, Web
     Application Services, Batch Processing Services, and Other Services.

 14. Review node information.

 15. At this stage, you have specified details for the database node and the primary applications
     node. Click Next to bypass the step where you would create additional ones..

 16. Review pre-install checks. Rapid Install performs a series of system tests to validate the
                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                  de
     configuration specified. The System Check Status screen checks port availability, then the
     Validate System Configuration screen indicates whether pre-install requirements for the
     installation have been met.
                                                                                               ca
 17. If no problems are detected, Rapid Install now displays an alert window and asks you to
                                                                                             A
                                          le
     verify that you are ready to begin the installation. Click Yes.


                                       ac
 18. Once Rapid Install completes the installation, verify the results that are displayed for various
                                     r
     post-installation checks, then close Rapid Install.

                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                               Chapter 3 - Page 67
 Solution - Performing a Standard Installation
 1. Change to the rapidwiz directory of the StartCD stage area and start the Rapid Install wizard
    by typing rapidwiz at the prompt.

      $ rapidwiz

 2. Click Next on the Welcome screen. Choose an operation in the Select Wizard Operation
    screen.

      a) Choose Install Oracle Applications Release 12. Do not select Use Express Install.

      b) Click Next.

 3. For the purposes of this lab, decline Oracle Configuration Manager setup.

 4. On the Configuration Choice screen, choose Create a new configuration, then click Next.

 5. Specify Global System Settings. Click on the Port Pool drop-down list to see the pools on
    offer, then accept the default pool (0). Optionally, click on Edit Ports to see how you could
    change individual ports within a pool, then click Cancel to close the Edit Ports window
    without making any changes. Click Next.

 6. Define database node configuration.
                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                                 de
      a) Identify the type of database by selecting the appropriate entry from the drop-down list.
         Select the Fresh Database option (not the Vision demo database).
                                                                                               a
      b) Supply a name for your database (provided by your instructor).
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
                                       ac
      c) Click Next.


                                     r
 7. Enter database directory information.

      a) Verify the Oracle OS user. O ly
                                 l & On
      b) Enter the Oracle OS group.


                               na se
      c) Set the Base Install directory for the database tier components. Your instructor will

                             er U
         provide you with the directory location.


                          nt
                        I
      d) Use the Advanced Edit button to manually update the individual mount points.


             le
      e) Click Next

           c
  ra
 8. Select product license type.


O     a) Select the Suite Licensing option.

                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 68
      b) Click Next.

 9. Select country-specific functionality.

      a) Do not select a country-specific functionality at present.

      b) Click Next.

 10. Select Additional languages.

      a) View the Available Languages list. Do not select any additional languages at present.

      b) Click Next.

 11. Select the Internationalization settings. The default base language, territory, and character
     sets are shown.

      a) Select the base language.

               •    American_English-US

      b) Select the territory.

          •   America

                                                                                                     m y
                                                                                                   de
      c) Select the database character set. The drop-down list shows the supported character sets
         for the languages you have selected.

          •   UTF8
                                                                                                ca
      d) Select the APPL_TOP character set.                                                   A
                                          le
                                       ac
          •   UTF8

                                     r
      e) Do not update the IANA character set. This value automatically changes with the
         APPL_TOP character set.
                                    O ly
      f) Click Next.
                                 l & On
                               na se
 12. Enter primary application node details. Having specified the base directory for the database,


                             er U
     you now specify the base directory and subdirectories associated with the application tier


                          nt
     nodes. The values you define here are the top-level directories used to calculate the settings
     for each instance and are carried over to the lower-level directories. You can change the
                        I
     default values for any of the following fields, to suit the configuration of your environment.


           c le
      a) Verify the Apps OS user.



O ra  b) Enter the Apps OS group.



                                 Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                                Chapter 3 - Page 69
      c) Enter the Base Install directory for the application tier components. Your instructor will
         provide you with the directory location.

      d) Accept the default value for Instance Directory.

      e) Click the Edit Paths button to see how you could update individual mount points, then
         cancel this operation without making any changes.

      f) Click Next.

 13. Use the Edit Services button to screen to choose which services are enabled on this
     Applications node. The role of an application tier node in Release 12 depends not on the
     software installed, but the services enabled. Choose all the services.

 14. Review node information. Rapid Install uses the values specified in this window to configure
     your services, such as the forms and web servers, as well as your listener services and
     processes.

 15. At this stage, you have specified details for the database node and the primary applications
     node. For this lab, you will only be creating a single Applications node, so click Next to
     bypass the step where you would create additional ones..

 16. Review pre-install checks. Rapid Install performs a series of system tests to validate the
     configuration specified. The System Check Status screen checks port availability, then the
     Validate System Configuration screen indicates whether pre-install requirements for the
                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                  de
     installation have been met.

     Ensure all the checks have been passed. If any have not, click Back and go back to correct
     the problem.                                                                              ca
                                                                                             A
                                          le
 17. If no problems are detected, Rapid Install now displays an alert window and asks you to


                                       ac
     verify that you are ready to begin the installation. Click Yes. Progress bars will display the
     installation status.
                                     r
                                    O ly
 18. Once Rapid Install completes the installation, verify the results that are displayed for various
     post-installation checks, then close Rapid Install.

                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                               Chapter 3 - Page 70
 Practice - Additional Installation Runs
 Overview
 In this practice, you can either carry out another installation, trying different options and
 resolving any problems that arise, or the simpler option of an Express Install.

 Tasks
      There are no formal tasks for this practice. Base your activities on the Performing a Standard
      Installation lab.

      At the end of your additional install runs, ensure you have a working installation for use in
      later practices.




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                               Chapter 3 - Page 71
 Solution - Additional Installation Runs
      You will need to check available disk space with the “df –h” command. If there is too little
      for another install, delete your existing installation using the “rm –rf *” command (having
      double-checked you are in the correct directory). If there is sufficient space for another
      install, remember that you will need to use different port numbers (choose a different port
      pool), as well as using a different top-level directory.




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Performing an Installation
                                              Chapter 3 - Page 72
                                                         Finishing Your Installation
                                                         Chapter 4



                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                               Chapter 4 - Page 1
                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                               Chapter 4 - Page 2
 Finishing Your Installation




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                               Chapter 4 - Page 3
 Objectives




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Objectives
                                          le
                                       ac
  Just as the preliminary installation steps were crucial in having a successful installation, the
  post-installation steps are important in providing a fully configured Oracle Applications system
  for your users.                    r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                               Chapter 4 - Page 4
 Module Overview




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Overview
                                          le
                                       ac
  Once Rapid Install completes the installation of Oracle Applications, there are a number of
  post-installation tasks to complete. Some of these tasks are necessary to finish a new
                                     r
  installation, an upgrade, or a technology stack installation for Oracle Applications Release 12.
                                    O ly
  Other tasks may be required only for systems with specific functionality. This module


                                 l & On
  discusses the required and conditional tasks.



                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                               Chapter 4 - Page 5
 Required Post-installation Steps




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Required Post-install Steps
                                          le
                                       ac
  These tasks are required for all Oracle Applications installations.

                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                               Chapter 4 - Page 6
 Log In to Oracle Applications




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Log In to Oracle Applications
                                          le
                                       ac
  You log in to Oracle Applications using a web browser from the Applications Login page
  URL, at:
                                     r
  http://<host name>.<domain name>:<HTTP port>/OA_HTML/AppsLogin
  For example:                      O ly
                                 l & On
  http://apps1.company.com:8000/OA_HTML/AppsLogin


                               na se
  Once the connection has been made, the Applications Login page appears. as shown on the
  slide. Enter your username and password.



                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                               Chapter 4 - Page 7
 E-Business Suite Home Page




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 E-Business Suite Home Page
                                          le
                                       ac
  After your credentials have been validated on the Login page, the E-Business Suite Home Page
  appears. You can use this page to access responsibilities for any of the individual Oracle
                                     r
  Applications products that your organization has licensed. The E-Business Suite Home Page
                                    O ly
  provides a single point of access to HTML-based applications, Forms-based applications, and


                                 l & On
  Business Intelligence applications.
  The system administrator should log in the first time using the System Administrator login


                               na se
  account that is pre-configured in the Applications installation. Use the System Administrator


                             er U
  responsibility to launch an Applications Forms session where the system administrator can
  complete the implementation steps.


                        I nt
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                               Chapter 4 - Page 8
 Change Default Passwords




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Change Passwords
                                          le
                                       ac
  The default passwords for the SYSTEM and SYS Oracle Applications database accounts are
  manager and change_on_install, respectively. To maintain database security and restrict access
                                     r
  to these accounts, you should change these passwords without delay, ensuring that your
                                    O ly
  choices meet your organization's security requirements. The password for both SYS and


                                 l & On
  SYSTEM in the Vision Demo is manager.
  You should also change the default passwords for the Applications product accounts of the


                               na se
  production and test databases




                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                               Chapter 4 - Page 9
 Configure Database Initialization Parameters




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
 Configure Database Initialization Parameters


                                       ac
  The current init.ora settings allow for a total of 100 connections. However, after the standard
  setup is complete, only a few users can be connected because of the connections used by the
                                     r
  concurrent managers, AQ workers, and job queues.
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 10
 Review Security Practices




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Review Security Practices
                                          le
                                       ac
  Review the recommended security processes documented in OracleMetaLink Note 403537.1,
  Best Practices for Securing Oracle E-Business Suite Release 12.
                                     r
  In particular, if you have any computers that require direct access to the Applications database,
                                    O ly
  but are not registered nodes in AutoConfig (such as OAM clients), you must explicitly grant


                                 l & On
  access as described in the Oracle TNS Listener Security chapter of that document.



                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 11
 Update PL/SQL Log and Out Directory




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Update PL/SQL Log and Out Directory
                                          le
                                       ac
  The temporary directory on your database server for log and output files from PL/SQL
     concurrent programs is set to /usr/tmp (UNIX) or C:\TEMP (Windows) by default. This
                                     r
     value is specified in the utl_file_dir parameter of the database initialization file, and
                                    O ly
     assigned to the APPLPTMP environment variable. As the temporary files placed in this


                                 l & On
     directory may contain sensitive information, it should have suitably restricted access, such
     as read and write access for the account that owns the database.


                               na se
  This can be achieved by proceeding as follows:


                             er U
  1. Enter your choice of directory as the new value for utl_file_dir in the database initialization
     parameter file.

                          nt
  2. Use the edit AutoConfig parameters feature of Oracle Applications Manager to update the
                        I
     APPLPTMP variable in the Applications context file with the new utl_file_dir directory

             le
     location.

           c
  3. Run AutoConfig to recreate the environment files.



O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 12
 Implement Product and Country-Specific Functionality




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
 Implement Product and Country-specific Functionality


                                       ac
   Depending on which products or country-specific functionality you plan to use in your
   installation, you may need to perform additional tasks or apply additional patches. Refer to the
                                     r
   individual product or country-specific implementation manuals, user's guides, or
   OracleMetaLink for details..
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 13
 Configure Client Software




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Configure Client Software
                                          le
                                       ac
  The connection between the client and the E-Business Suite forms is provided through an
  applet in the client Web browser.
                                     r
  Instead of using the browser's own JVM, Oracle Applications Release 12 uses the Sun J2SE
                                    O ly
  Native Plug-in, which is invoked when a user chooses to access functions that require it, such


                                 l & On
  as running a form. If the J2SE Plug-in has not been installed, the browser prompts the user to
  download the required installation executable.


                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 14
 Conditional Tasks Specific to Your Installation




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Tasks Specific to Your Installation
                                          le
                                       ac
  These tasks are conditionally required, depending on the configuration of your Oracle
  Applications system.
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 15
 Conditional Tasks Specific to Your Installation




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 16
 Set Up Printers




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Set Up Printers
                                          le
                                       ac
  For details about setting up printers in your Oracle Applications installation, refer to the Oracle
  Applications System Administrator’s Guide.
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 17
 Set Up Printers - Windows




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Set Up Printers - Windows
                                          le
                                       ac
  The concurrent manager starts by default under the internal SYSTEM account. This account
  does not have access to network printing devices. To run reports using the concurrent manager,
  complete the steps in the slide.   r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 18
 Resize Your Database




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Resize Your Database
                                          le
                                       ac
  You will need to increase the size of your database to meet the specific requirements of your
  system. The increase will in part depend on the products you have licensed and the additional
                                     r
  features (such as multiple languages or multiple organizations) you configure in your
  installation..
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 19
 Set Up National Language Support (NLS)




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Set Up National Language Support (NLS)
                                          le
                                       ac
  Although the base product files are provided in American English, Oracle Applications is
  available in many different languages. Running Oracle Applications in languages other than
                                     r
  American English is referred to as National Language Support or NLS. You can also run
                                    O ly
  Oracle Applications in multiple languages simultaneously, and this is referred to as


                                 l & On
  Multilingual Support or MLS.
  If you are performing an NLS installation, Rapid Install installed the translated files for all


                               na se
  active languages during the installation. To finish the installation for NLS, follow the


                             er U
  instructions in the Oracle Applications NLS Release Notes (available on OracleMetaLink).



                        I nt
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 20
 Set Up Unicode Character Sets




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Set Up UTF8 Character Set
                                          le
                                       ac
  Regardless of the languages installed, you may need to complete additional steps if you use a
  Unicode character set, such as UTF8, in the database tier.
                                     r
  With Release 12, UTF8 and AL32UTF8 are both supported Unicode character sets in the
                                    O ly
  database. However, supplementary characters are not supported.


                                 l & On
  If you customize seed data, your changes may be overwritten during an upgrade. This also
  applies to any changes to translations of seed data made using the globe icon.

                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 21
 Complete Oracle Workflow Notification Mailer Configuration




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
 Complete Oracle Workflow Notification Mailer Configuration


                                       ac
  1. From the Applications Dashboard of Oracle Applications Manager, select Workflow
  Manager from the "Navigate to" pull-down menu, and click on the Go button.
                                     r
  2. In the Workflow System region, click the Notification Mailers status icon to navigate to the
                                    O ly
  Service Components page for notification mailers. At this point, the Notification Mailers status


                                 l & On
  icon should be showing the status Down.
  3. In the Service Components page, select the Workflow Notification Mailer service

                               na se
  component and click the Edit button to navigate to the Notification Mailer configuration


                             er U
  wizard.


                          nt
  4. In the Outbound Email Account (SMTP) region, enter the name of the outbound SMTP mail
  server.
                        I
  5. If you want to enable inbound email processing, select the Inbound Processing parameter in

             le
  the Inbound Email Account (IMAP) region, and enter the name of the inbound IMAP mail

           c
  server, the username and password of the email account that the Notification Mailer uses to



O ra
  receive email messages, and the reply-to address of the email account that receives incoming
  messages, to which notification responses should be sent.


                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 22
   6. Click Apply, then r eturn to the Service Components page and verify that the status of the
   Workflow Notification Mailer service component is now Running.




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 23
 Set Up and Implement Oracle Embedded Data Warehouse
 (EDW)




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
                                       ac
 Set Up and Implement Oracle Embedded Data Warehouse (EDW)

                                     r
  The Embedded Data Warehouse (EDW) is a foundation technology for Oracle Business

                                    O ly
  Intelligence applications. This end-to-end solution provides an open schema and extensible
  data warehousing architecture, powered by robust data warehousing tools.


                                 l & On
  EDW includes fact tables from seven intelligence areas: Financials, Projects, Purchasing,
  Manufacturing, Marketing, Human Resources, and Supply Chain.

                               na se
  If you licensed Oracle Embedded Data Warehouse (EDW), you must complete additional setup

                             er U
  and implementation steps before using this product.


                        I nt
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 24
 Set Up and Implement Discoverer End User Layer (EUL)




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
 Set Up and Implement Discoverer End User Layer (EUL)


                                       ac
  To use Discoverer, you need a database account that enables you to connect to Discoverer. You
  store database account details in a Discoverer connection, along with EUL and language
  settings.                          r
                                    O ly
  To set up and implement the End User Layer, follow the instructions documented in


                                 l & On
  OracleMetaLink Note 373634.1, Using Discoverer 10.1.2 with Oracle E-Business Suite
  Release 12.


                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 25
 Set Up Demand Planning




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Set Up Demand Planning
                                          le
                                       ac
  To set up and begin using Demand Planning, you must perform the implementation tasks
  outlined in the Oracle Demand Planning Installation and Configuration Guide.
                                     r
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 26
 Convert to a Public Sector, Education, or Not-for Profit System




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
 Convert to a Public Sector, Education, or Not-for-Profit System


                                       ac
  Rapid Install sets up products for commercial or for-profit use. To convert your system to use
  public sector, education, or not-for-profit products after the installation is complete, use
                                     r
  License Manager to register public sector or not-for-profit products.
                                    O ly
  See Oracle Applications Maintenance Utilities for information on registering products.


                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 27
 Implement Multiple Organizations




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Implement Multiple Organizations
                                          le
                                       ac
   The Oracle Applications Multiple Organizations Architecture provides support for multiple
   organizations in a single installation of Oracle E-Business Suite, with relationships you define.
                                     r
   Multiple Organizations specifies how the different organizations interact, and how transactions
                                    O ly
   flow between them. These organizations can be ledgers, business groups, legal entities,


                                 l & On
   operating units, or inventory organizations.
   When you install a production E-Business Suite system, the data model is identical whether


                               na se
   you implement Multiple Organizations or not. The Multiple Organizations views used to


                             er U
   partition data are incorporated into the normal install, and use predefined text. When you
   convert to Multiple Organizations, tables are renamed to use the "_ALL" suffix to denote that

                          nt
   they now contain Multiple Organizations partitioned data.

                        I
   In Release 12, the AD Administration utility is used for the initial conversion of seed data and

             le
   transaction data to Multiple Organizations format. Note that the underlying data model is not
   changed. When you create a new operating unit, a concurrent program adds the appropriate
           c
  ra
   seed data.


O
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 28
 Back Up Oracle Applications




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Back Up Oracle Applications
                                          le
                                       ac
  After installation is complete, your operating system administrator should back up the Oracle
  Applications product files, including the Application Server technology stack
                                     r
  components. Your database administrator should back up the Oracle Applications database
  components.                       O ly
                                 l & On
  Subsequently, you should establish a backup policy that meets your organization's needs,
  balancing the overhead of carrying out the chosen backup type and frequency against the need

                               na se
  to be able to recover from a variety of types of system failure.


                             er U
  The backup procedures should be tested periodically.



                        I nt
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 29
 Understand System Administration and Maintenance Tasks




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
 Understand System Administration Tasks
                                          le
                                       ac
  You should be familiar with the information in the three-volume Oracle Applications System
  Administrator’s Guide. It contains important information about Oracle Applications.
                                     r
 Understand Oracle Applications Maintenance Tasks
                                    O ly
  You should be completely familiar with the information in both volumes of the Maintaining

                                 l & On
  Oracle Applications Documentation Set (Oracle Applications Maintenance Utilities and
  Oracle Applications Maintenance Procedures). Both books contain important details about

                               na se
  maintenance utilities and tasks.



                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 30
 Module Summary




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 31
 Module Discussion




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 32
 Module Practice




                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 33
 Practice - Accessing Oracle Applications and Configuring the
 Client Software
 Overview
 In this practice, you access Oracle Applications and navigate to various pages. You also install
 the Java client software on the client machine.

 Tasks
 1. Start the web browser and navigate to the Oracle Applications login screen.

 2. Enter the following credentials and click Login:

      •    Username: sysadmin

      •    Password: sysadmin

 3. Click on System Administrator in the E-Business Suite home page.

 4. Click the Define (Security: User) option. You will be prompted to install the Java client
    software.

                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                  de
 5. Install the Java client software.



                                                                                               ca
                                                                                             A
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                               Chapter 4 - Page 34
 Solution - Accessing Oracle Applications and Configuring the
 Client Software
 1. Start the web browser and navigate to the following URL:

            http://hostname>.<domain name>:<HTTP port>

            For example:

            http://abc900.company.com:1234

            Where abc900 is the hostname, company.com is the domain name, and 1234 is the web
            port.

 2. Enter the following credentials and click Login:

      •    Username: sysadmin

      •    Password: sysadmin

 3. Click on the System Administrator responsibility in the E-Business Suite home page.

 4. Click the Define (Security: User) option. You will be prompted to install the Java client
                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                  de
    software. You may need to start a new browser session and connect to Oracle Applications.



                                                                                               ca
                                                                                             A
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                               Chapter 4 - Page 35
                                                                                                   m y
                                                                                               a de
                                                                                            A c
                                          le
                                     r ac
                                    O ly
                                 l & On
                               na se
                          nt er U
                        I
           c le
O ra
                               Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Finishing Your Installation
                                              Chapter 4 - Page 36
                                                            Oracle Applications
                                                            Components
                                                            Chapter 5

                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                       le
                                  r ac
                                 O ly
                              l & On
                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                  Chapter 5 - Page 1
                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                       le
                                  r ac
                                 O ly
                              l & On
                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                  Chapter 5 - Page 2
 Oracle Applications Components




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                       le
                                  r ac
                                 O ly
                              l & On
                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                  Chapter 5 - Page 3
 Objectives




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                       le
                                  r ac
                                 O ly
                              l & On
                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                  Chapter 5 - Page 4
 Module Overview




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Overview
                                       le
                                    ac
  This module covers the different tiers and components of Oracle Applications Release 12.
  Some will be described in greater detail than others.
                                  r
                                 O ly
                              l & On
                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                  Chapter 5 - Page 5
 Multi-Tier Architecture




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Multi-tier Architecture
                                       le
                                    ac
  In the multi-tier model, functions of the Oracle Applications architecture are distributed among
  multiple levels, or tiers. Although many machines may be used in an installation, scalability is
                                  r
  derived from the logical division of processing capabilities across three distinct levels: the
                                 O ly
  desktop (or client) tier, the application (or middle) tier, and the database tier.


                              l & On
  The tiers referred to are virtual, and do not represent physical machines. Each tier can consist
  of one or more machines (often called nodes). This is particularly true of the application tier,


                            na se
  where the various servers (groups of processes that run on a single machine and provide a


                          er U
  particular functionality) are often divided between several machines. Equally, a node can
  accommodate more than one tier. For example, the database server can reside on the same node

                       nt
  as one or more of the servers in the application tier.

                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                  Chapter 5 - Page 6
 Desktop Tier: Traditional Forms Interface




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Desktop Tier
                                       le
                                    ac
  The client interface is provided through either the newer HTML interface or the traditional
  Forms interface. The HTML interface products require only a Web browser on the desktop tier.
                                  r
  For the Forms interface products, an additional component, the Forms Client Applet, is used in
                                 O ly
  conjunction with the Web browser. The Forms Client Applet downloads the necessary JAR


                              l & On
  files on demand, and they are cached locally for future use.



                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                  Chapter 5 - Page 7
 Desktop Tier: Forms Client Applet




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Forms Client Applet
                                       le
                                    ac
  The Forms Client Applet is a general-purpose presentation applet that supports Oracle
  Applications products that use the Forms interface, including those with customizations and
                                  r
  extensions. The Forms Client Applet is packaged as Java Archive (JAR) files, which contain
                                 O ly
  all Java classes typically required to run Oracle Applications forms.


                              l & On
  The Forms Client Applet displays Oracle Applications screens, and supports field-level
  validation, multiple coordinated windows, and data entry aids such as lists of values (LOVs).


                            na se
  The Forms Client Applet sends user requests to the forms server, and handles responses such


                          er U
  as screen updates.
  Required and commonly used JAR files are downloaded from the Web server at the beginning

                       nt
  of the client’s first session. Afterwards, they remain in the client’s local disk cache, ready for

                     I
  future sessions. When updated versions of the JAR files are installed on the application tier,

            le
  they are automatically downloaded to the desktop via the Java-enabled Web browser. Less
  commonly used JAR files are downloaded on demand.
          c
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                  Chapter 5 - Page 8
 Desktop Tier: Java Client




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Desktop Java Client
                                       le
                                    ac
  The Forms client applet must run within a Java Virtual Machine (JVM) on the desktop client.
  The Sun J2SE Plug-in component allows use of the Oracle JVM on web clients, instead of the
                                  r
  browser's own JVM. This component is implemented as a browser plug-in.
                                 O ly
  In the traditional, Forms-based Oracle Applications environment, the JVM was run as part of


                              l & On
  the standard Applications sign-on process. Now, with the move to a mainly HTML-based
  environment, the JVM (now the J2SE Plug-in) is only invoked when a user chooses to access


                            na se
  functions that require it, such as running a form. If the J2SE Plug-in has not been installed, the


                          er U
  browser prompts the user to download the required installation executable.
  The slide shows the Java console, which can be displayed by selecting “Show console” on the

                       nt
  “Advanced” tab of the J2SE plug-in control panel. This can be useful in diagnosing problems

                     I
  with JAR file downloads.


          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                  Chapter 5 - Page 9
 Application Tier




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Application Tier
                                       le
                                    ac
  The application tier, sometimes referred to as the middle tier, hosts the various services and
  servers that implement and execute the business logic, and mediates communications between
                                  r
  the desktop tier and the database tier.
                                 O ly
  The following services and servers make up the application tier:


                              l & On
    • Web Services


                            na se
    • Forms Services
    • Concurrent Processing Server

                          er U
  At present, Web Entry Point Services, Web Application Services, and Root Services must all


                       nt
  be installed on the same node.

                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 10
 Application Tier: Load Balancing




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Load Balancing
                                       le
                                    ac
  The application tier supports load balancing among many of the servers to provide high
  availability, fault tolerance, reliability and scalability.
                                  r
  Wherever possible, you should use the same platform (such as Linux) for all application tier
                                 O ly
  machines. Do not attempt to use a mixture of UNIX and Windows machines. As well as


                              l & On
  having to manage patches for the disparate platforms, there are technical limitations.



                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 11
 Application Tier: HTML-Based Applications




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 HTML-Based Applications
                                       le
                                    ac
  The HTML-based applications (formerly known as Self-Service Applications) have the
  following characteristics:
                                  r
  • Do not use Oracle Forms for the interface
                                 O ly
  • Are designed in pure HTML and JavaScript

                              l & On
  • Dynamically generate HTML pages by executing Java code


                            na se
  • Use a metadata dictionary for flexible layout
  • Operate by direct connection to the Web server



                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 12
 Application Tier: Oracle Applications Framework




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Oracle Applications Framework
                                       le
                                    ac
  The Oracle Applications Framework is the development platform for HTML-based
  applications. It consists of a Java-based application tier framework and associated services,
                                  r
  designed to facilitate the rapid deployment of HTML-based applications.
                                 O ly
  The Framework-based applications logic is controlled by procedures that execute through the


                              l & On
  Java servlet engine, which is provided by the Apache JServ module. The servlet engine uses
  the metadata dictionary in constructing the Framework UI.


                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 13
 Application Tier: Oracle Applications Framework Components




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                       le
 Oracle Applications Framework Components


                                    ac
    • AOL/J (AOL Java) provides the Oracle Applications Framework with underlying
       security and Applications Java services. It provides the Oracle Applications Framework
                                  r
       with its connection to the database and with application-specific functionality, such as
                                 O ly
       flexfields and attachments.


                              l & On
    • BC4J (Business Components for Java), included in Oracle JDeveloper, is used to create
       Java business components for representing business logic. It also provides a mechanism


                            na se
       for mapping relational tables to Java objects and allows the separation of the application


                          er U
       business logic from the UI.
    • The Java controller processes the programmatic UI definition.

                       nt
    • The Apache JServ module provides the Java servlet engine, which uses the metadata
                     I
       dictionary to construct the Framework UI.

            le
    • The HTML UI generator, UIX.

          c
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 14
 Application Tier: Oracle Applications Framework Processing




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                       le
 Oracle Applications Framework Processing


                                    ac
  With Oracle Applications Framework, an HTML-based Applications module uses the
      following access path:
                                  r
    1. The user clicks on the hyperlink of a function from a browser.
                                 O ly
    2. The browser makes a URL request to the Web listener.

                              l & On
    3. AOL/J validates user access to the page.


                            na se
    4. The page definition is loaded from the Metadata Dictionary on the database tier into the
        application tier (Metadata UI Definition).

                          er U
    5. The BC4J objects that contain the applications logic and access the database are
        instantiated.
                       nt
                     I
    6. The Java Controller programmatically manipulates the page definition as necessary,


            le
        based on dynamic UI rules.

          c
    7. UIX (HTML UI Generator) interprets the page definition, creates the corresponding


  ra
        HTML in accordance with UI standards, and sends the page to the browser.


O
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 15
 Application Tier: Java Servlet Access with HTML Applications




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                       le
 Java Servlet Access with HTML Applications


                                    ac
  When using a JavaServer Page (JSP), the HTML interface module uses the following access
      path:
                                  r
    1. The user clicks the hyperlink of a function from a browser.
                                 O ly
    2. The browser makes a URL request to the Web listener.

                              l & On
    3. The Web listener contacts the servlet engine (JServ) where it runs a JSP.


                            na se
    4. The JSP obtains the content from the Applications tables and uses information from the
        metadata dictionary to construct the HTML page.

                          er U
    5. The resulting HTML page is passed back to the browser via the Web server.


                       nt
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 16
 Application Tier: Forms Services




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Forms Services
                                       le
                                    ac
  The Forms services component hosts the Oracle Applications forms and the Forms runtime
  engine. Acting as the engine of the Oracle Applications Forms-based interface, the Forms
                                  r
  services component mediates the communication between the desktop client and the Oracle
                                 O ly
  database server. It manages the display of information in the client browser, and also updates


                              l & On
  the database as necessary.
  Where applicable, the Forms services component caches data and provides it to the client as


                            na se
  needed. For example, this feature is used when scrolling through multiple order lines that


                          er U
  cannot be displayed on a single screen.
  By default, Forms services in Oracle Applications Release 12 are provided by the Forms

                       nt
  listener servlet, a Java servlet that delivers the ability to run Oracle Forms applications over

                     I
  HTTP or HTTPS connections. It hosts the Oracle Applications forms and associated runtime

            le
  engine, mediating the communication between the desktop client and the Oracle database
  server, displaying client screens, and initiating changes in the database according to user
          c
  ra
  actions.


O
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 17
 Application Tier: Forms Services Architecture




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Forms Services Architecture
                                       le
                                    ac
  The Forms services architecture is essentially a three-tier architecture:

                                  r
    • The Forms client applet is located on the desktop. The user passes information to the
       application tier by entering text in a field or clicking a button.
                                 O ly
    • The application tier hosts the user interface logic that determines the response needed

                              l & On
       when a user initiates an action. For example, this may be to open a new window, run a
       query, or populate a related field.

                            na se
    • The database tier hosts the database and data-intensive logic. It is contacted to retrieve


                          er U
       data not already cached on the application tier, or where additional processing is needed.


                       nt
  In this configuration, where all logic is located on the servers, software updates need only be
  performed in one data center, and are immediately accessible to users via a LAN, WAN, or
                     I
  even a dial-up connection.

            le
  To minimize network traffic, the Forms client applet is downloaded automatically the first time
          c
  a user accesses Oracle Applications. The applet is then stored on the desktop, so does not need


O ra
  to be downloaded with each subsequent connection to Oracle Applications.



                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 18
 Application Tier: Network Traffic




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Low Network Traffic
                                       le
                                    ac
  Forms listener servlet can communicate with the desktop client using these network protocols:

                                  r
  • Standard HTTP network connection

                                 O ly
  • Secure HTTPS network connection
  • TCP/IP connection

                              l & On
  By default Oracle Applications Release 12 utilizes Forms listener servlet mode. However,


                            na se
  socket mode is still fully supported, and its use may be required in a WAN environment, to
  optimize performance.



                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 19
 Application Tier: Network Traffic




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Low Network Traffic
                                       le
                                    ac
  Once a connection is made, many operations can be performed on the client either without
  contacting the Forms services at all, or with minimal interaction.
                                  r
  For example, if a user is entering data for specific field items, there is no need to update an
                                 O ly
  entire screen when only a few fields are updated. In this scenario, only the changed fields are


                              l & On
  updated with the new values. Consequently, this is much more efficient than a full screen
  painting application.


                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 20
 Application Tier: Concurrent Processing Server




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Concurrent Processing Server
                                       le
                                    ac
  Most user interactions with Oracle Applications data are conducted via the HTML interface or
  the Forms interface. However, some reporting and updating programs may need to be run
                                  r
  either periodically or on an ad hoc basis. As these programs may require a large number of
                                 O ly
  computations, they are run in the background at a time, and with a priority, such that the work


                              l & On
  of interactive users is not impeded. Such programs are run on the Concurrent Processing
  server.


                            na se
  You submit a request to run a concurrent program through an Oracle Applications form. The


                          er U
  request inserts a row into a database table, specifying the program to be run. Concurrent
  managers read the applicable requests in the table and start the relevant concurrent programs.

                       nt
  Note: Log and output files from concurrent programs are generated on the Concurrent

                     I
  Processing server. These should be monitored for errors, and archived or deleted when no

            le
  longer needed. Failure to do so will eventually result in a shortage of disk space.

          c
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 21
 Application Tier: Report Review Agent




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Report Review Agent
                                       le
                                    ac
  The log or output file that results from a concurrent request is sent to a utility known as the
  Report Review Agent, which passes a file containing the entire report to the Forms services,
                                  r
  which passes the report back to the user’s browser one page at a time.
                                 O ly
                              l & On
                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 22
 Application Tier: Accessing Concurrent Processing Output




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Accessing Concurrent Processing Output
                                       le
                                    ac
  1. The Concurrent Processing server communicates with the data server using Oracle Net.

                                  r
  2. The resultant concurrent program log or output file from a request is passed back as a
     report to the Report Review Agent.
                                 O ly
  3. The Report Review Agent passes a file containing the entire report to the forms server.

                              l & On
  4. The Forms Services component passes the report back to the user’s browser one page at


                            na se
     time. Profile options can be used to control the size of the files and pages passed, to suit
     report volume and available network capacity.



                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 23
 Application Tier: Administration Server (Obsolete)




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Administration Server
                                       le
                                    ac
  The term Administration server is a historical one: there is no such component in the Release
  12 architecture. By default, any application tier node can be used to carry out the following
  operations:                     r
                                 O ly
    • Applying database patches to Oracle Applications - Most patches consist of files and


                              l & On
       scripts that update the file system and database objects. You use the AutoPatch utility
       (adpatch) to perform these updates. AutoPatch may also be used to apply cumulative


                            na se
       patches such as minipacks and maintenance packs.


                          er U
    • Maintaining Oracle Applications data - Some features require regular maintenance to
       ensure that the system is operating optimally. The AD Administration utility (adadmin)

                       nt
       enables you to carry out this and other file system and database maintenance tasks.

                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 24
 Database Tier




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Database Tier
                                       le
                                    ac
  The database tier contains the Oracle database server, which stores all the data maintained by
  Oracle Applications. The database also stores the Oracle Applications online help information.
                                  r
  The database server does not communicate directly with desktop clients, but rather with the
                                 O ly
  servers on the application tier, which mediate communication between the database server and


                              l & On
  the clients.



                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 25
 Oracle Homes




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Oracle Homes
                                       le
                                    ac
  The Applications Release 12 architecture utilizes three ORACLE_HOMEs:

                                  r
    • The 10g Release 2 (10.2) Database Server ORACLE_HOME replaces the Oracle9i
      ORACLE_HOME used in Release 11i.
                                 O ly
    • The Application Server 10.1.2 ORACLE_HOME (sometimes referred to as the Tools, C,

                              l & On
      or Developer ORACLE_HOME) replaces the 8.0.6 ORACLE_HOME in Release 11i.


                            na se
    • The Application Server 10.1.3 ORACLE_HOME (sometimes referred to as the Web or
      Java ORACLE_HOME) replaces the iAS ORACLE_HOME in Release 11i.



                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 26
 Oracle Homes




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Oracle Homes
                                       le
                                    ac
  The slide summarizes the Oracle Home architecture in Release 12.

                                  r
                                 O ly
                              l & On
                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 27
 Oracle Applications Technology Layer




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Oracle Applications Technology Layer
                                       le
                                    ac
  The Oracle Applications technology layer is an integrated collection of components whose
  functionality is applicable to all Oracle Applications modules. Components in the Oracle
                                  r
  Applications technology layer include:
    • Applications DBA (AD)      O ly
                              l & On
    • Application Object Library (FND)


                            na se
    • Applications Utilities (AU)
    • Workflow (WF)
    • Alert (ALR)


                       nt
    • OA Framework (FWK)  er U
                     I
    • Oracle XML Publisher (XDO)


          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 28
 Oracle Applications DBA (AD)




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Oracle Applications DBA (AD)
                                       le
                                    ac
  The Applications DBA product provides a set of tools for administration of the Oracle
  Applications file system and database. AD tools are used for installing, upgrading,
                                  r
  maintaining, and patching the Oracle Applications system. The AD utilities include:
                                 O ly
    • AD Administration - Performs general maintenance tasks for Oracle Applications.


                              l & On
    • AD Merge Patch - Merges multiple patches into a single, integrated patch.


                            na se
    • AutoConfig - Manages configuration changes in an Oracle Applications system.
    • AutoPatch - Applies patches and adds new languages and products to an Oracle

                          er U
      Applications system.


                       nt
    • Rapid Clone - Used to clone an Oracle Applications system.

                     I
    • Rapid Install - Sets up a fully configured Oracle Applications system, including the latest


            le
      certified technology stack and all patches, minipacks, and other updates.

          c
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 29
 Oracle Application Object Library (FND)




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                       le
 Oracle Application Object Library (FND)


                                    ac
  The Oracle Application Object Library is a key component of the Applications technology
  layer. It consists of a collection of reusable code, programs, and database objects that provides
                                  r
  common functionality across all products.
                                 O ly
  Oracle Application Object Library offers many features to facilitate system administration.


                              l & On
  These include:
    • Security setup and maintenance features.

                            na se
    • Management of concurrent processing.


                          er U
    • Uniformity between products of flexfield processing and procedures for report


                       nt
       submission.

                     I
    • Capability to allow the creation of custom programs that interact with the base
       Applications modules.


          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 30
 Oracle Application Object Library: End User Features




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 End User Features
                                       le
                                    ac
  Oracle Application Object Library includes several features that help provide uniformity of
  function across the various Applications products:
                                  r
    • Standard user interface - The Application Object Library supports the integration of
                                 O ly
      Oracle Applications by providing standardized functionality and capabilities across all


                              l & On
      products so that the look and feel do not vary from product to product.
    • Shared flexfield value sets - Flexfields allow the entry of certain important information to

                            na se
      be standardized across all products. One example is the Accounting flexfield, which is


                          er U
      used by Financials products and Manufacturing products.


                       nt
    • Standard Report Submission (SRS) - The procedure to submit a background report to
      the concurrent manager using SRS is the same regardless of the product that owns the
                     I
      report. SRS takes advantage of shared flexfield value sets.

            le
    • Applications Online Help - The presentation of Applications Online Help is also

          c
      standardized across all products and accessed through a browser.



O ra• Profile options - Applications Object Library allows you to configure Oracle Applications
      easily by setting certain profile options.


                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 31
 Oracle Application Object Library: Developer Features




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Developer Features
                                       le
                                    ac
  Application Object Library provides many features for developers creating custom forms,
  reports or programs that interface with Oracle Applications.
                                  r
    • GUI and coding standards - The same coding and Graphical User Interface (GUI)
                                 O ly
      standards used by Oracle Applications developers are available to custom developers.


                              l & On
    • Standard Report Submission - Custom reports can be integrated into Standard Report
      Submission so that they can be submitted and monitored using the same procedures as

                            na se
      other Oracle Applications reports. Developers can set up certain menus and


                          er U
      responsibilities to access custom reports or standard objects.


                       nt
    • Flexfield development - Flexfields used in custom forms can take advantage of existing
      flexfield capabilities such as value sets, validation, and security rules.
                     I
    • Custom menus and responsibilities - Custom menus and responsibilities can be

            le
      seamlessly integrated with Oracle Applications.

          c
  Detailed information on custom features for developers is available in the Oracle Applications


O ra
  Developer’s Guide.



                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 32
 Oracle Application Object Library: System Administration
 Features




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                       le
                                    ac
 System Administration Features

                                  r
  Oracle Application Object Library provides many features to simplify administration of Oracle

                                 O ly
  Applications, enabling the system administrator to carry out routine tasks quickly and easily.
  These features include the ability to:

                              l & On
   • Set up new users - Register new Oracle Applications users and give them access to only


                            na se
      those forms, functions, and reports they need to do their jobs.
   • Manage and control security - Decide which users have access to each product, and

                          er U
      within a product, which forms, functions, and reports a user can access.


                       nt
   • Audit user activity - Monitor what users are doing and when. Choose who to audit and

                     I
      what type of data to audit.


            le
   • Set user and system profiles - A profile is a set of changeable options that affects the
      way Oracle Applications looks and behaves. A system administrator can set profile values
          c
  ra
      at the site, application, responsibility, and user levels.


O
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 33
     • Manage concurrent processing - A system administrator can monitor and control
       concurrent processing using various interfaces, including forms and Oracle Applications
       Manager (OAM).




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                       le
                                  r ac
                                 O ly
                              l & On
                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 34
 Oracle Application Object Library: Security Features




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Application Object Library Security
                                       le
                                    ac
  Application Object Library controls access to the data in Oracle Applications via user sign-ons
  and responsibilities. Each user must have a user name and password to gain access to Oracle
  Applications.                   r
                                 O ly
  A responsibility is a level of authority in Oracle Applications that lets Applications users


                              l & On
  access only those functions and data appropriate to their role in the organization.
  Responsibilities allow access to a specific product, operating unit, set of books and a restricted


                            na se
  list of windows, functions, reports, and groups of products, or data groups.


                          er U
  The forms available from the navigation menus vary by responsibility. For example, the
  Purchasing User navigation menu does not include all the forms that are available to the

                       nt
  Purchasing Super User navigation menu.

                     I
  When you install Oracle Applications, a standard Applications user called SYSADMIN is

            le
  created for you. Several default responsibilities are also created. Since the SYSADMIN sign-

          c
  on is automatically assigned the System Administration responsibility, you can use


  ra
  SYSADMIN to create new user sign-ons and assign them to responsibilities. You can also
  create any custom responsibilities you need.

O
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 35
 Oracle Applications Utilities (AU)




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Oracle Applications Utilities (AU)
                                       le
                                    ac
  The Applications Utilities (AU) component is used to maintain the Oracle Applications system.

                                  r
  AU hosts a collection of files copied from other products. This allows generating on-site
  classes of files such as Forms and reports, or running reports invoked by the reports server
                                 O ly
  from a standard, shared location. Generating forms or reports may require access to shared


                              l & On
  PL/SQL libraries, so these files are copied to AU_TOP as well.



                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 36
 Oracle Applications Framework (OAF)




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Oracle Applications Framework (OAF)
                                       le
                                    ac
  OA Framework is a Java and XML-based development method used in Oracle E-Business
  Suite to develop HTML-based applications. OA Framework pages are based around the
                                  r
  Model-View-Controller (MVC) design strategy that mixes declarative (XML-based) and
                                 O ly
  programmatic (Java-based) components to create a complete web-based application.


                              l & On
  OA Framework pages are developed using a version of Oracle's JDeveloper 10g tool
  specifically tailored for use with Oracle E-Business Suite. While the Java-based components of


                            na se
  OA Framework pages are stored in the file system, the declarative XML-based UI is stored in
  the Metadata Store (MDS). By storing the XML data centrally (in MDS) and hierarchically (in

                          er U
  XML), OA Framework allows page attributes to be modified and changed easily, via
  Personalizations.
                       nt
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 37
 Oracle Workflow (WF)




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Oracle Workflow
                                       le
                                    ac
  Oracle Workflow provides an infrastructure for the enterprise-wide communication of data
  related to defined business events, providing the capabilities needed to:
                                  r
    • Manage enterprise business processes that may span trading partners
                                 O ly
    • Support standard and personalized business rules

                              l & On
    • Streamline and automate transaction flows


                            na se
    • Manage exceptions without manual intervention
  Oracle Workflow lets you model and maintain your business processes using a graphical

                          er U
  workflow builder. You can model and automate sophisticated business processes, defining


                       nt
  processes that can loop, branch into parallel flows and rendezvous, decompose into sub-flows,

                     I
  branch on task results, time out, and more.


            le
  Acting as a system integration hub, Oracle Workflow can apply business rules to control
  objects and route them between applications and systems. It extends the reach of business
          c
  process automation throughout an enterprise and beyond, to include any email user, web user,


O ra
  or system, enabling people to receive, analyze, and respond to notifications needing their
  attention. Users can respond to a notification via any standard email system or standard Web
  browser.

                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 38
 Oracle Alert (ALR)




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Oracle Alert (ALR)
                                       le
                                    ac
  Oracle Alert (ALR) allows you to email system notifications to users when an exception or
  event occurs. Some products are delivered with predefined alerts, which can be used to notify
                                  r
  users about specified database exceptions as they occur, and perform routine tasks
                                 O ly
  automatically according to a schedule you define.


                              l & On
  For example, you can configure Oracle Alert to send an email to key database administrators
  when a tablespace in the Oracle Applications database does not have adequate free space.


                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 39
 Oracle XML Publisher (XDO)




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Oracle XML Publisher (XDO)
                                       le
                                    ac
  XML Publisher is a Java-based product based on the Worldwide Web Consortium (W3C)
  Extensible Stylesheet Language (XSL). Specifically, XML Publisher utilizes the XSL-FO
                                  r
  standard to transform XML data into a formatting object (FO).
                                 O ly
  Oracle XML Publisher uses data definitions and templates to produce output reports in the


                              l & On
  desired format. A data definition is a data source (or a combination of data sources) that either
  is XML or can produce XML. Examples of definitions include output from concurrent


                            na se
  programs and Web services. A template is a report definition, which sets out how a report


                          er U
  should look.
  Key features of XML Publisher include:

                       nt
    • Provides a template-based, easy-to-use publishing solution for end-users
                     I
    • Allows users to employ familiar desktop tools to create and maintain reports in their

            le
       preferred format, and then use XML Publisher to convert them to the XSL-FO format

          c
    • Offers a variety of options for published documents, such as multiple output formats,


O ra   multiple languages, and multiple delivery options
    • Uses the Oracle database for storage


                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 40
 Oracle Applications Manager (OAM)




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 System Administration and OAM
                                       le
                                    ac
  Oracle Applications Manager (OAM) is a sophisticated tool that supports managing and
  monitoring an Oracle Applications system from an HTML-based central control console.
                                  r
  Among other tasks, Oracle Applications Manager can help you to:
                                 O ly
  • Configure and administer your system

                              l & On
  • Diagnose and correct problems


                            na se
  • Manage patches
  • Monitor and tune performance

                          er U
  • Monitor system security

                       nt
  OAM is built into Oracle Applications and available as standard. You can also license the
                     I
  optional Application Management Pack for Oracle E-Business Suite. For further details, see

            le
  OracleMetaLink Note, 394448.1, Getting Started with the Application Management Pack for

          c
  Oracle E-Business Suite.



O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 41
 Release 12 Applications Technology Stack – Key Changes




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Key Changes
                                       le
                                    ac
  This slide recaps the main changes to the Applications technology stack in Release 12.

                                  r
                                 O ly
                              l & On
                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 42
 Module Summary




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                       le
                                  r ac
                                 O ly
                              l & On
                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 43
 Module Discussion




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                       le
                                  r ac
                                 O ly
                              l & On
                            na se
                       nt er U
                     I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Components
                                                 Chapter 5 - Page 44
                                                             Environment Files, Control
                                                             Scripts, and Languages
                                                             Chapter 6

                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 1
                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 2
 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 3
 Objectives




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 4
 Topic Overview




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Overview
                                        le
                                     ac
  A number of environment files are used to control the setup and configuration of an Oracle
  Applications system. This module explains the role of these environment files, and describes
                                   r
  the type of information they contain.
                                  O ly
  The module also describes the language-related components of Oracle Applications. It explains


                               l & On
  how character sets are used to support languages, and how language components are stored
  within the file system.


                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 5
 Environment Files




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Environment Files
                                        le
                                     ac
  Rapid Install creates individual environment setup files for the Oracle database server, Oracle
  tools technology stack, Java technology stack, and Oracle Applications.
                                   r
  The environment setup files are called <CONTEXT_NAME>.env on UNIX, or
                                  O ly
  <CONTEXT_NAME>.cmd on Windows. <CONTEXT_NAME> is the Applications context


                               l & On
  name, which by default is <SID>_<hostname>.
  In addition to these individual environment files, a consolidated environment file in the

                             na se
  APPL_TOP directory, APPS<CONTEXT_NAME>.env (APPS<CONTEXT_NAME>.cmd on


                           er U
  Windows) sets up the Oracle Applications and Oracle technology stack environments.


                        nt
  This consolidated environment file is implemented differently on UNIX and Windows:
    • On UNIX, you run the consolidated environment file APPS<CONTEXT_NAME>.env as
                      I
       a normal UNIX script.

            le
    • On Windows, you run the %APPL_TOP%\envshell<CONTEXT_NAME>.cmd command
          c
       file to create a command window which runs the consolidated environment file,


O ra   APPS<CONTEXT_NAME>.cmd. All subsequent operations on the APPL_TOP (for
       example, running adadmin or adpatch) must be carried out from this window. Details of
       the environment file are stored in the Windows Registry.

                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 6
 Main Applications Environment File




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Oracle Applications Environment Files
                                        le
                                     ac
  Many of the parameters are specified during the install process. Parameter values can also be
  changed using Oracle Applications Manager.
                                   r
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 7
 Key Parameters in <CONTEXT_NAME>.env




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Key Parameters in <CONTEXT_NAME>.env
                                        le
                                     ac
   • APPLFENV – The name of this environment file, <CONTEXT_NAME>.env. If you
      rename the environment file, change this parameter.
                                   r
   • PLATFORM – The execution platform. The value should match the value in the
      APPL_TOP/admin/adpltfrm.txt.O ly
                               l & On
   • APPL_TOP – The top-level directory for this Oracle Applications installation.


                             na se
   • ADMIN_SCRIPTS_HOME – Directory under $INST_TOP that Identifies the location
      of scripts such as adautocfg.sh, adpreclone.sh, adstrtal.sh, and adstpall.sh.


                           er U
   • FNDNAM – The name of the ORACLE schema to which the System Administration


                        nt
      responsibility connects. This is set to APPS and should not be changed.

                      I
   • GWYUID – The public username and password that grants access to the Oracle
      Applications initial sign-on form. The default is APPLSYSPUB/PUB and should not be

            le
      changed.
          c
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 8
 Key Parameters in <CONTEXT_NAME>.env




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
 Key Parameters in <CONTEXT_NAME>.env (cont.)


                                     ac
   • FND_TOP – The path to the Application Object Library directory. For example,
      apps/apps_st/appl/fnd/12.0.0.
                                   r
   • AU_TOP – The path to the Applications Utilities directory. For example,
      apps/apps_st/appl/au/12.0.0.O ly
                               l & On
   • <PROD>_TOP – The path to a product’s top-level directory. There is one entry for each
      Oracle Applications product.

                             na se
   • PATH – Sets the directory search path. Primarily for use with FND_TOP and AD_TOP.


                           er U
   • APPLDCP – Specifies whether Parallel Concurrent Processing is being used. Should be


                        nt
      set to OFF if this feature is not being used.

                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 9
 Key Parameters in <CONTEXT_NAME>.env




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
 Key Parameters in <CONTEXT_NAME>.env (cont.)


                                     ac
   • APPCPNAM – Indicates whether the format of the concurrent manager log and output
      files follow 8.3 filename conventions (maximum of 8 characters to the left of the dot and 3
                                   r
      to the right, for example, alogfile.log). If this parameter is set to ‘REQID’, concurrent
                                  O ly
      processing uses file names that meet 8.3 naming requirements.


                               l & On
   • APPLCSF – Identifies the top-level directory for concurrent manager log and output files
      if they are consolidated into a single directory across all products. For example,


                             na se
      /inst/apps/<context>/logs/appl/conc.


                           er U
   • APPLLOG – The subdirectory for concurrent manager log files. The default is log.


                        nt
   • APPLOUT – The subdirectory for concurrent manager output files. The default is out.

                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 10
 Key Parameters in <CONTEXT_NAME>.env




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
 Key Parameters in <CONTEXT_NAME>.env (cont.)


                                     ac
   • APPLTMP – Identifies the directory for Oracle Applications temporary files. The default
      is /tmp on UNIX and C:\TEMP on Windows.
                                   r
   • APPLPTMP – Identifies the directory for temporary PL/SQL output files. The options
                                  O ly
      must be listed in the init.ora parameter utl_file_dir.


                               l & On
   • INST_TOP – Identifies the top-level directory for this instance. For example,
      inst/apps/<context>. New with Release 12.

                             na se
   • NLS_LANG – The language, territory, and character set installed in the database. The


                           er U
      default for a fresh install is "AMERICAN_AMERICA.US7ASCII".



                      I nt
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 11
 Key Parameters in <CONTEXT_NAME>.env




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
 Key Parameters in <CONTEXT_NAME>.env (cont.)


                                     ac
   • NLS_DATE_FORMAT – The National Language Support date format. The default is
      "DD-MON-RR", e.g. 31-JUL-07.
                                   r
   • NLS_NUMERIC_CHARACTERS – The National Language Support numeric
                                  O ly
      separators. The default is ".,“ (period and comma).


                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 12
 Temporary Files




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Temporary Files
                                        le
                                     ac
  Most temporary files are written to the location specified by the APPLTMP environment
  setting, which is set by Rapid Install.
                                   r
  Oracle Applications also produces temporary PL/SQL output files as part of concurrent
                                  O ly
  processing operations. These files are written to a location on the database server node


                               l & On
  specified by the APPLPTMP environment setting. The APPLPTMP directory must be the same
  directory as specified by the UTL_FILE_DIR parameter in the database initialization file.


                             na se
  Rapid Install sets both APPLPTMP and the UTL_FILE_DIR parameter to the same default


                           er U
  directory. On a multi-node system, the directory defined by APPLPTMP does not need to exist
  on the application tier servers.


                      I nt
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 13
 The adovars.env File




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 The adovars.env File
                                        le
                                     ac
  The adovars.env file is located in $APPL_TOP/admin and called from
  <CONTEXT_NAME>.env. It specifies the location of various types of file, by means of
                                   r
  various environment variables, including:
                                  O ly
    • JAVA_TOP – The top-level directory to which all Java files are copied.


                               l & On
    • OA_JRE_TOP – The location where JRE is installed.


                             na se
    • OAH_TOP – The location to which HTML files are copied.
    • OAD_TOP – The locations to which context-sensitive documentation files are copied.

                           er U
    • LD_LIBRARY_PATH – Used on many UNIX platforms to list the directories scanned


                        nt
       for dynamic library files needed at runtime.

                      I
    • CLASSPATH – Lists the directories and zip files scanned for Java class files needed at


            le
       runtime.

          c
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 14
 The adconfig.txt File




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 The adconfig.txt File
                                        le
                                     ac
  AD utility programs perform a variety of database and file management tasks, for which they
  require access to specific configuration details. This information, specified when Oracle
                                   r
  Applications is installed, is stored in the adconfig.txt file in the <APPL_TOP>/admin directory.
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 15
 The fndenv.env File




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 The fndenv.env File
                                        le
                                     ac
  The fnddev.env file, located in the FND_TOP directory, sets additional environment variables
  used by Oracle Application Object Library. For example, it sets APPLBIN to the name of the
                                   r
  bin subdirectory where product executable programs and shell scripts are stored.
                                  O ly
  This file should not be modified: the default values are applicable for all customers.


                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 16
 The devenv.env File




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 The devenv.env File
                                        le
                                     ac
  The devenv.env file sets variables that let you link third-party software and your own custom
  applications with Oracle Applications. This script is located in FND_TOP, and is automatically
                                   r
  called by fndenv.env so that you can compile and link custom Oracle Forms user exits and
                                  O ly
  concurrent programs with Oracle Applications.


                               l & On
  See the Oracle Applications Developer’s Guide for detailed information on customizing the
  devenv.env file.


                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 17
 Application Tier Server Control Scripts




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Application Tier Server Control Scripts
                                        le
                                     ac
  AutoConfig utilizes a number of application tier control scripts, located in
  $ADMIN_SCRIPTS_HOME ($INST_TOP/admin/scripts).
                                   r
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 18
 Application Tier Server Control Scripts




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
 Applications Tier Server Control Scripts


                                     ac
  There is an alternative method of controlling server processes on Windows:

                                   r
   1. Go to Start > Administrative Tools > Services

                                  O ly
   2. Select the relevant service from the Services window.
   3. Click Start or Stop, as required.

                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 19
 Application Tier Server Control Scripts




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Application Tier Server Control Scripts
                                        le
                                     ac
  The adstrtal.sh and adstpall.sh scripts (command files on Windows) are the most convenient
  way to start and stop all application tier processes.
                                   r
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 20
 Application Tier Server Control Scripts




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Application Tier Server Control Scripts
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 21
 Application Tier Server Control Scripts




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Application Tier Server Control Scripts
                                        le
                                     ac
  adcmctl.sh and adcmctl.cmd require the APPS username and password.

                                   r
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 22
 Modifying Environment Files




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 23
 Oracle Applications Languages




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Oracle Applications Languages
                                        le
                                     ac
  Oracle Applications can be run in languages other than American English, and it can be run in
  multiple languages simultaneously.
                                   r
  National Language Support (NLS) refers to the ability to run an Applications instance in a
                                  O ly
  supported language, including specific regional number and date formats.


                               l & On
  Multiple Language Support (MLS) refers to the ability to support multiple languages in the
  same Oracle Applications instance. Most products in Applications Release 12 are MLS-
  enabled.
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 24
 Oracle Applications Languages




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Oracle Applications Languages
                                        le
                                     ac
  The language directory code is used to name the directory containing files specific to a
  language. For example, American English language-specific files are located in the ‘us’
  subdirectory.                    r
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 25
 Oracle Applications Languages




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 26
 Oracle Applications Languages




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 27
 Character Sets – Introduction




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Character Sets
                                        le
                                     ac
  Character sets are sets of encoded binary values that represents letters, numerals, and
  punctuation marks. A character set, sometimes called a codeset, supports one or more
                                   r
  languages. For example, the WE8ISO8859P1 character set can be used by English and many
                                  O ly
  other languages that use a Latin-based alphabet and Arabic numerals. Computer displays and


                               l & On
  printers convert these encoded values to characters they can display or print.
  The Unicode (UTF8) character set supports all characters in common use in all of the world’s


                             na se
  modern languages. In Oracle Applications, support for Unicode removes the limitation on the


                           er U
  number of supported languages that can be run in a single database.



                      I nt
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 28
 Character Sets – Database Tier




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
 Languages and Character Sets on the Database Tier


                                     ac
  By default, Rapid Install creates a production database with the US7ASCII character set, and a
  Vision demo database with the UTF8 character set. The US7ASCII character set only supports
                                   r
  American English. However, you can choose any other supported character set during the
                                  O ly
  installation. Other character sets vary in the number of languages they support.


                               l & On
  This has several implications. For example, if you need to support the French language and
  also want to use the euro symbol, you might choose WE8ISO8859P15 as the database


                             na se
  character set when running Rapid Install. WE8ISO8859P15 is a superset of US7ASCII,


                           er U
  supports both English and French, and contains the euro symbol. If you need to support
  English, French, Japanese, and Arabic, you must choose UTF8, Oracle’s Unicode character set,

                        nt
  as this is the only one that supports all four of these languages.

                      I
  Unicode character sets such as UTF8 have the advantage of being variable length, depending

            le
  on the data. For example, if you use Unicode to store both English and Japanese data, only the
  Japanese data would require multiple bytes. If you use a fixed length character set like
          c
  ra
  JA16EUC, both the English and Japanese data would require multiple bytes.


O
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 29
   Using a multibyte character set such as UTF8, as opposed to a single-byte character set such as
   WE8ISO8859P15, may require more space for language setup and transaction data. This is
   because each character used may require more than one byte of storage space.




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 30
 Character Sets – Application Tier




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
 Languages and Character Sets on the Application Tier


                                     ac
  By default, Rapid Install creates the application tier file system for a production instance with
  the US7ASCII character set, and the file system for a Vision demo instance with the UTF8
                                   r
  character set. However, you can choose any other supported character set during the
                                  O ly
  installation. Rapid Install recommends the application tier character set based on the languages


                               l & On
  licensed.
  Character sets on all tiers must be compatible with each other. In particular, the Web server


                             na se
  must use a character set that is supported by the browser on the desktop tier. This is the only


                           er U
  compatibility requirement between the desktop tier and application tier. All other application
  tier servers can be configured with any character set that is compatible with the database server

                        nt
  character set. If one character set does not contain all characters in the others, replacement

                      I
  characters will be used, and data lost as a result.


            le
  As UTF8 is a superset of all other supported character sets, there are no other fully compatible
  character sets. Hence if you use UTF8 on any tier, you must use it on all tiers.
          c
  ra
  All application tier servers must also have the same set of languages installed.


O
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 31
 Character Sets – Desktop Tier




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
 Languages and Character Sets on the Desktop Tier


                                     ac
  Language support, which includes support for data input methods, character sets, and fonts,
  must be available on the desktop client. The character set of the browser is set by Oracle
                                   r
  Applications for each session, and must not be changed in that session.
                                  O ly
  The desktop browser must support character set and language-specific capabilities. For


                               l & On
  instance, Hebrew and Arabic require bidirectional support for right-to-left display, and Arabic
  also requires a browser capable of special character shaping.


                             na se
  If the UTF8 character set is installed on the application tier, the desktop client operating system


                           er U
  must support Unicode.



                      I nt
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 32
 Globalizations and Country-specific Functionalities




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Globalization and Localization
                                        le
                                     ac
  Globalization is the process of designing and deploying software that meets the needs of a
  global enterprise. One requirement for successful globalization is to meet the statutory, legal,
                                   r
  and cultural practices of a given locality. In Oracle Applications, this is achieved through
                                  O ly
  national and regional extensions called country-specific functionalities. As country-specific


                               l & On
  functionalities are all compatible with each other, installation of all required country-specific
  functionalities results in a globalized implementation.


                             na se
  All country-specific functionalities are installed when you run the Rapid Install. You simply


                           er U
  license those you wish to use. The functionality of each country-specific functionality is
  described in a special User’s Guide for each country.


                      I nt
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 33
 Dates and Numbers




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Dates and Numbers
                                        le
                                     ac
  You can enter and view dates in any valid format, such as 10/25/04, 25-10-2004, or 2004-10-
  25. Any format for which SQL provides a mask is valid. The only exception is Oracle Reports,
                                   r
  which always uses the format DD-MON-RRRR; for example, 25-OCT-2004.
                                  O ly
  Regardless of the various formats that may be used to enter dates and numbers, the actual


                               l & On
  values are stored in the database in uniform canonical formats. This allows date and number
  values to be entered in one format and viewed in an alternative format by another user.


                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 34
 National Language Support (NLS)




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 National Language Support (NLS)
                                        le
                                     ac
  Oracle’s National Language Support (NLS) allows data to be stored, processed, and retrieved
  in the most appropriate language for the users. It ensures that database utilities and error
                                   r
  messages, sort order, date, time, monetary, numeric, and calendar conventions reflect the
  language and locale.
                                  O ly
                               l & On
  The profile options for language and territory are configured at the site level when you run
  Rapid Install. The base language is used for the default language setting. The default user


                             na se
  territory you choose is used for the territory profile option. The site-level profile option values


                           er U
  provide the default NLS settings for all end users. Users inherit these values the first time they
  log on to Oracle Applications using the E-Business Suite home page.

                        nt
  A user can continue to use the default values, or change any of the NLS settings to alternative

                      I
  values. Updated values are stored in the database at user level, and all future sessions are

            le
  started with them.

          c
  Date and numeric formats are based on the territory profile setting selected during installation


  ra
  with Rapid Install. Although the system administrator can change date and numeric formats
  after Rapid Install completes, we recommend accepting the defaults provided by the territory

O setting.

                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 35
 NLS and Application Tier Servers




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 NLS and Application Tier Servers
                                        le
                                     ac
  A user’s NLS preferences (such as language, territory, date format, and number format) are
  passed with each user request to an application tier server, where a session is started with the
  corresponding NLS settings.      r
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 36
 Translation Patches




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Translation Patches
                                        le
                                     ac
  All Oracle Applications patches are translation-aware. The AutoPatch utility reads information
  in the base language patch (American English), and uses the system configuration details to
                                   r
  determine whether you need to apply a translation patch.
                                  O ly
  A translation patch contains only components that require translation and are applied on top of


                               l & On
  the base patch. In many cases, translation patches are released simultaneously with the base
  patch. Otherwise, they are available shortly thereafter.


                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 37
 Translated Language Items




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 38
 Module Summary




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 39
 Module Discussion




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 40
 Module Practice




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 41
 Practice - Reviewing the Environment File
 Overview
 In this practice, you review some of the contents of the Applications environment file.

 Tasks
 1. Log in as the applmgr user.

 2. Run the consolidated Applications environment file.

 3. Open the main Applications environment file and view the contents.

 4. Determine the NLS parameters.

 5. View adovars.env.




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 42
 Solution - Reviewing the Environment File
 1. Log in as the applmgr user.

 2. Run the consolidated Applications environment file.
    This file is located in the $APPL_TOP and is called APPS<context name>.env.

      $ cd <path to APPL_TOP>
      $ . APPS<context name>.env

      Note: If you are using a pre-staged system, ask your instructor for the absolute path to
      APPL_TOP.

 3. Open the main Applications environment file and view the contents.
    The main Applications environment file is called <context name>.env and is located directly
    under APPL_TOP. Usually, <context name> is <SID>_<hostname>.

 4. Determine the NLS parameters.
    The main Applications environment file contains parameters specific to NLS. These are
    located in the section titled “National Language Support environment variables”.

 5. View adovars.env.
    adovars.env is located in $APPL_TOP/admin. Review this environment file and its contents.
                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 43
 Practice - Starting and Stopping Server Processes
 Overview
 When Rapid Install installs Oracle Applications, it configures and starts all server processes. In
 this practice, you start and stop server processes manually.

 Tasks
 1. Log in as applmgr, the owner of the Applications file system (APPL_TOP and Applications
    technology stack).

 2. Run the consolidated Applications environment file.

      Note: If you are using a pre-staged system, ask your instructor for the absolute path to
      APPL_TOP.

 3. Navigate to the $INST_TOP/admin/scripts directory and review the files in this directory.

 4. Stop the Concurrent Processing server process.
    The file header for each script contains instructions on how to run the script.

 5. Restart the Concurrent Processing server process.
                                                                                                       m y
 6. Stop all application tier server processes.

                                                                                                   a de
 7. Attempt to access the Oracle Applications Login Page. What happens?

 8. Restart all the application tier server processes.                                          A c
                                        le
                                     ac
 9. Examine the other server process scripts and, if time permits, use them to stop and start the
    various application tier server processes.
                                   r
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 44
Solution - Starting and Stopping Server Processes
1. Log in as applmgr, the owner of the Applications file system (APPL_TOP and Applications
   technology stack). Ask your instructor for the default Applications user id if you are using
   the pre-staged system.

2. Run the consolidated Applications environment file.
   This file is located in the APPL_TOP and is called APPS<context name>.env.

     $ cd $APPL_TOP
     $ . APPS<context name>.env

     Note: If you are using a pre-staged system, ask your instructor for the absolute path to
     APPL_TOP.

3. Navigate to the $INST_TOP/admin/scripts directory.

     List the files in this directory.
     Use the ls -l command to see the files in this directory. Each server process control script for
     the application tier is owned by the applmgr user.

4. Stop the Concurrent Processing server process.
   The file header for each script contains instructions on how to run the script. Use the
                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                    de
   following command to stop the Concurrent Processing server:

     $ adcmctl.sh stop

     Check the script exit status.                                                               ca
                                                                                               A
                                       le
5. Restart the Concurrent Processing server process.


                                    ac
   Use the following command to start the Concurrent Processing server process:

     $ adcmctl.sh start
                                  r
                                 O ly
     Check the script exit status.

                              l & On
6. Stop all application tier server processes using the following command:

                            na se
                          er U
     $ adstpall.sh APPS/<APPS password>


                       nt
7. Attempt to access the Oracle Applications Login Page.

                     I
   Start the web browser and navigate to the following URL:



         c le
          http://<hostname>.<domain name>:<HTTP port>




O ra      For example:
          http://abc900.company.com:1234


                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                               Chapter 6 - Page 45
           Where abc900 is the hostname; mycompany.com is the domain name; and 1234 is the
           web port.

           You will receive an error message that the browser is unable to connect.

 8. Restart all the application tier server processes using the following command:

     $ adstrtal.sh APPS/<APPS password>

 9. Examine the other server process scripts and, if time permits, use them to stop and start the
    various application tier server processes.




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Environment Files, Control Scripts, and Languages
                                                Chapter 6 - Page 46
                                                             Oracle Applications File
                                                             System
                                                             Chapter 7

                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                         le
                                    r ac
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                   Chapter 7 - Page 1
                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                         le
                                    r ac
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                   Chapter 7 - Page 2
 Oracle Applications File System




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                         le
                                    r ac
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                   Chapter 7 - Page 3
 Objectives




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                         le
                                    r ac
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                   Chapter 7 - Page 4
 Module Overview




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Overview
                                         le
                                      ac
  This module describes the file system used to store the files belonging to Oracle Applications.
  The module details the structure and introduces the contents of the key directories.
                                    r
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                   Chapter 7 - Page 5
 Module Overview




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                         le
                                    r ac
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                   Chapter 7 - Page 6
 INST_TOP Directory




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 INST_TOP Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
   Oracle Applications Release 12 introduces the concept of a top-level directory for an
   Applications instance. This directory is referred to as the Instance Home, and denoted by the
                                    r
   environment variable $INST_TOP. For example, /u01/oracle/VIS/inst/apps/<context_name>.
                                   O ly
   Using an Instance Home provides the ability to share Applications and technology stack code


                                l & On
   among multiple instances. Other benefits include support for read-only file systems and
   centralization of log files.


                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                   Chapter 7 - Page 7
 Database Tier File System




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                         le
 Oracle Applications File System - Database Tier


                                      ac
  Oracle Applications uses components from many different Oracle products. The product files
  are stored under several top level directories, including:
                                    r
  • The db/apps_st/data directory is located on the database node machine, and contains the
                                   O ly
  system tablespaces, redo log files, data tablespaces, index tablespaces, and database files


                                l & On
  • The db/tech_st/10.2.0 directory is located on the database node machine, and contains the
  ORACLE_HOME for the Oracle10g database

                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                   Chapter 7 - Page 8
 Application Tier File System




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                         le
 Oracle Applications File System - Application Tier


                                      ac
   Oracle Applications uses components from many different Oracle products. The product files
   are stored under several top level directories, including:
                                    r
   • The apps/apps_st/appl (APPL_TOP) directory contains the product directories and files for
   Oracle Applications             O ly
                                l & On
   • The apps/apps_st/comn (COMMON_TOP) directory contains directories and files used
   across products

                              na se
   • The apps/tech_st/10.1.2 directory contains the ORACLE_HOME used for the Applications


                            er U
   technology stack tools components


                         nt
   • The apps/tech_st/10.1.3 directory contains the ORACLE_HOME used for the Applications
   technology stack Java components
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                   Chapter 7 - Page 9
 APPL_TOP Structure




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 APPL_TOP Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
  The Oracle Applications top-level directory path is defined by the APPL_TOP environment
  variable. The value of APPL_TOP is used in subsequent directory definitions. It can also be
                                    r
  used to refer to a particular Oracle Applications file system.
                                   O ly
  The Oracle Applications file system, under APPL_TOP, contains several different types of


                                l & On
  files and directories, which can be categorized as follows:
    • Oracle Applications environment files. The default name of the main Applications

                              na se
        environment file is <CONTEXT_NAME>.env, where the default value of


                            er U
        <CONTEXT_NAME> is <SID>_<hostname>. For convenience, there is also a
        consolidated environment file called APPS<CONTEXT_NAME>.env.

                         nt
    • A directory for each product, licensed or not, that has been installed under the APPL_TOP
        directory.
                       I
            le
    • Additional directories for administration and maintenance of all products. Examples

          c
        include the admin and au directories.



O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 10
 Product Directories




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Oracle Applications Product Directories
                                         le
                                      ac
  Each product has its own subdirectory under APPL_TOP, and the Oracle Applications base
  release is typically reflected in the subdirectory name. For Release 12, the base release is
  12.0.0.                           r
                                   O ly
  The directory path for a particular product is defined by the value of the environment variable


                                l & On
  <PROD>_TOP, where < PROD> is the product schema name. For example, the slide shows
  several product directories below the APPL_TOP (appl). The full paths to these product


                              na se
  directories could be as follows:


                            er U
    • APPL_TOP=/u01/oracle/VIS/apps/apps_st/appl


                         nt
    • AU_TOP= /u01/oracle/VIS/apps/apps_st/appl/au/12.0.0
    • FND_TOP = /u01/oracle/VIS/apps/apps_st/apps/fnd/12.0.0
                       I
    • INV_TOP= /u01/oracle/VIS/apps/apps_st/apps/inv/12.0.0

            le
  All Oracle Applications products, regardless of license status, are installed in the database and
          c
  the file system. Files for unlicensed products should not be removed. Conversely, multiple


O ra
  releases and product versions must not be installed under a single APPL_TOP directory.



                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 11
 Globalization Products




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Globalization Products
                                         le
                                      ac
  Globalizations are Oracle Applications components that provide additional functionalities for a
  particular country or region. For example, the payment processing features of Oracle Payables
                                    r
  may need to be extended to provide a feature needed for banks in a certain country. There may
                                   O ly
  be similar requirements to meet regulations imposed by different governments.


                                l & On
  All Globalizations (known as Localizations in some earlier releases of Oracle Applications) are
  installed in both the file system and the database.


                              na se
  A Globalization product may require additional:


                            er U
    • Forms


                         nt
    • Reports

                       I
    • Seed data in the base product tables


            le
    • Database tables or other database objects

          c
  Globalization products cannot be licensed directly: they are associated with country-specific


  ra
  functionalities, and licensed automatically when a country-specific functionality is licensed.


O
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 12
 Applications Context File




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Applications Context File
                                         le
                                      ac
  The Applications context file, $INST_TOP/appl/admin/<context_name>.xml, is a repository
  for environment-specific details used by AutoConfig to configure the application tier.
                                    r
  Information from this file is used to generate Applications configuration files and update
                                   O ly
  relevant database profiles. Information stored includes:


                                l & On
    • Name and location of the database
    • Port numbers for Forms and Web services

                              na se
    • Product-specific port numbers


                            er U
    • Information about application tier services controlled by AutoConfig


                         nt
  The values of the context variables that make up the context file are in part determined by the

                       I
  choices you make when you run Rapid Install. For example, when you specify that a particular
  application tier machine is to be used for concurrent processing, the variable ‘s_batch_status’

            le
  will be set to ‘enabled’ in the Applications context file.
          c
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 13
 Applications Product Directories




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Product Directories
                                         le
                                      ac
  Each Oracle Applications product directory contains numerous subdirectories, which are used
  to group the various types of file used by the product.
                                    r
  Not all products have all the subdirectories shown on the slide. There may also be differences
                                   O ly
  depending on installation choices.


                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 14
 Applications Product Directories




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 The admin Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
  The admin subdirectory contains files used by to upgrade products to the current release, and
  has several subdirectories of its own:
                                    r
  driver - Contains the upgrade driver files (.drv). Examples include:
                                   O ly
    • glfile.drv - Lists the GL files needed to run the product.

                                l & On
    • glcommon.drv – Common file driver called by other products that need to use GL code.


                              na se
  sql - Contains SQL scripts and PL/SQL scripts used to upgrade data and PL/SQL package
  creation scripts.



                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 15
 Applications Product Directories




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 The bin Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
  C language programs and operating system shell scripts for each product are stored in the
  corresponding bin subdirectory. Some of the programs are concurrent programs and others are
                                    r
  command-line utilities. Of particular importance to Oracle Applications are the
                                   O ly
  $FND_TOP/bin and $AD_TOP/bin subdirectories.


                                l & On
  Some of the key programs in these subdirectories include:
  FNDLIBR - The concurrent manager (in FND_TOP/bin)

                              na se
  startmgr - A UNIX shell script to start the concurrent manager (in FND_TOP/bin)


                            er U
  fdfcmp - The flexfield compiler (in FND_TOP/bin)


                         nt
  FNDMDGEN - A message file generator (in FND_TOP/bin)

                       I
  adadmin - The AD Administration utility (in AD_TOP/bin)


            le
  adpatch - The AutoPatch utility (in AD_TOP/bin)

          c
  Note: The FND_TOP/bin and AD_TOP/bin directories are included in the PATH variable.

  ra
  This allows you to run FND and AD executables from any location.


O
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 16
 Applications Product Directories




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Forms Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
  Oracle Forms files include portable source files (.fmb files), and generated runtime files (.fmx
  files).
                                    r
  These two types of file are stored in different locations:
                                   O ly
    • Forms runtime files are stored in the forms subdirectory.

                                l & On
    • Forms source files are stored in AU_TOP/forms, to enable runtime files to be generated


                              na se
       when necessary.
  The forms directory contains a subdirectory for each installed language. These subdirectories

                            er U
  are named according to the language, such as US for American English forms, D for German


                         nt
  forms, and F for French forms.

                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 17
 Applications Product Directories




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Help Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
  The help directory contains online help source files, which are imported into the database to
  optimize performance. Under the help directory, a language directory stores the help files for
  each language.                    r
                                   O ly
  Note that while a fresh installation of Oracle Applications has online help installed


                                l & On
  automatically, an upgrade requires the help files to be installed as part of the post-upgrade
  tasks.


                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 18
 Applications Product Directories




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 The html Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
  The html subdirectory contains HTML, JavaScript (.js), and JavaServer Page (.jsp) files used
  by a product. The JavaScript and JavaServer Page files are kept in the main html directory.
                                    r
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 19
 Applications Product Directories




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 The lib Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
  The lib subdirectory contains files used to the relink Oracle Applications programs:

                                    r
    • Object files (.o files in UNIX and .obj files in Windows) - Consist of compiled C code;
       there is one for each C program unit that can be relinked.
                                   O ly
    • Library file (.a file in UNIX and .lib file in Windows) - Collections of objects common to

                                l & On
       a product’s constituent C programs.


                              na se
    • Make file (.mk file) - Specifies the exact compilation and linking steps needed to create
       each C executable in a product’s bin directory.


                            er U
  For example, the GL_TOP/lib directory contains:


                         nt
    • glpmai.o (object module for the GLPPOS program)

                       I
    • glcmai.o (object module for the GLCCON program)


            le
    • Numerous other .o files

          c
    • libgl.a (GL library file)



O ra• gl.mk (make file for all GL programs)
  Oracle Applications programs must be relinked using the AD Administration utility. The only
  exception are the AD programs themselves, which are relinked using the AD Relink utility. No

                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 20
   attempt should be made to build Oracle Applications programs manually with individual cc, ln,
   or make commands.




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                         le
                                    r ac
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 21
 Applications Product Directories




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Log and Out Directories
                                         le
                                      ac
  When the concurrent managers run Oracle Applications reports or data update programs, they
  write output files as well as diagnostic log files and temporary files to directories defined
                                    r
  during the installation process. The log directory holds concurrent log files from each
                                   O ly
  concurrent request and the out directory holds the concurrent report output files.


                                l & On
  There are two alternatives for storing log and output files:
    • In each product’s log and out subdirectories (as shown in the slide).

                              na se
    • In common log and out directories for all products, under a location pointed to by the


                            er U
       APPLCSF parameter in the <CONTEXT_NAME>.env environment file.


                         nt
  The log and out directories should be monitored for space usage, and the files archived or
  purged periodically. This is particularly true if you are using a common location, as space may
                       I
  be exhausted more rapidly. In addition, there may be significant contention when writing to a

            le
  common location on a busy system.

          c
  Log files may contain passwords or other sensitive data, so should be secured as appropriate.


O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 22
 Applications Product Directories




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 The mds Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
  This directory contains files and scripts used by Metadata Services (MDS), replacing the AK
  metadata repository used in some earlier releases of Oracle Applications.
                                    r
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 23
 Applications Product Directories




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 The mesg Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
  Oracle Applications stores message files in the mesg directory. Message files are used to
  display messages in forms and reports. Message files are translated and are named according to
                                    r
  the language they represent. For example:
                                   O ly
    • US.msb - The American English message file.


                                l & On
    • JA.msb - The Japanese message file.


                              na se
  You should have a message file for each language installed in your Oracle Applications
  system.



                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 24
 Applications Product Directories




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Patch Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
  The patch directory contains files AutoPatch uses to update the database.

                                    r
  Patch files are located according to function, in the following subdirectories:

                                   O ly
    • driver - Contains driver files (.drv). These are only used by older patches.
    • sql - Contains SQL (.sql) and PL/SQL (.pls) scripts.

                                l & On
    • odf - Contains object description files (.odf).


                              na se
    • import - Contains files used to update seed data.


                            er U
  The patch directory should not be used as a staging area to unzip patches.



                       I nt
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 25
 Applications Product Directories




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 The reports Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
  This directory contains the Oracle Reports files for a particular product. There is a portable
  binary (.rdf) file for each report.
                                    r
    • The AD Administration utility is used to generate reports.
                                   O ly
    • Generation of reports ensures that the PL/SQL is optimally compiled for the platform.

                                l & On
    • Reports are stored in a language-specific directory under the reports subdirectory.


                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 26
 Applications Product Directories




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 The sql Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
  The sql subdirectory contains SQL scripts used by Oracle Applications products at runtime.

                                    r
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 27
 Additional Language Subdirectories




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Additional Language Subdirectories
                                         le
                                      ac
  Translated forms files, reports files, and installation scripts are all stored in their own language-
  specific directories. These directories are identified by a language directory code. For example,
                                    r
  all forms files located under the US directory are in American English, while all forms files
                                   O ly
  located under the AR directory are in Arabic.


                                l & On
  Message files are not stored in language-specific directories. Instead, message files are named
  according to the language of the messages they contain. For example, AR.msb is a file


                              na se
  containing messages translated to Arabic.




                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 28
 $APPL_TOP/admin Directory




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 The $APPL_TOP/admin Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
  This directory contains files and scripts used by the AD utilities during the upgrade and
  maintenance processes.
  These files include:              r
                                   O ly
       •The adovars.env environment file, which defines certain file and directory locations

                                l & On
       •SQL scripts run during the upgrade


                              na se
       •log and out directories used by some AD utilities
       •A restart directory where AD programs create restart files



                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 29
 $APPL_TOP/admin Directory Text Files




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Text Files in the admin Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
  Many text files are stored under the admin directory. Used by the AD utilities, these files
  include:
                                    r
    • adconfig.txt - Contains system configuration variable values
                                   O ly
    • adlinkbk.txt - Lists files the AD Relink utility should back up rather than delete

                                l & On
    • applcust.txt - Lists any registered customizations


                              na se
    • applora.txt - Contains minimum or required settings for database initialization parameters
    • applprod.txt - Lists products available in this release

                            er U
    • applterr.txt - Contains territory descriptions for globalizations

                         nt
    • appl<LANG>.txt - Contains language translations of product names, for example
       applDK.txt
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 30
 AD Directory




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 The ad Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
  Applications DBA (AD) is a set of tools used for installing, upgrading, and administering the
  Oracle Applications system.
                                    r
  Utilities found in the AD directory include:
   • AD Administration (adadmin)   O ly
   • AutoPatch (adpatch)
                                l & On
                              na se
   • AutoConfig engine (adconfig.sh, called by $ADMIN_SCRIPTS_HOME/adautocfg.sh)




                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 31
 AU Directory




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 The au Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
  Applications Utilities (AU) are product files that are consolidated in a single location for
  optimal processing.
  These files include:              r
                                   O ly
   • PL/SQL libraries used by Oracle Reports, in the plsql subdirectory

                                l & On
   • PL/SQL libraries used by Oracle Forms, in the resource subdirectory


                              na se
   • Oracle Forms source files, in the forms subdirectory
   • A copy of all Java files in the java subdirectory



                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 32
 Common Components Directory




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Common Components Directory - COMMON_TOP
                                         le
                                      ac
  The $COMMON_TOP directory contains files used by many different Oracle Applications
  products, and which may also be used with third-party products.
                                    r
  The $COMMON_TOP/admin directory is the default location for the concurrent manager log
                                   O ly
  and output directories. When the concurrent managers run Oracle Applications reports, they


                                l & On
  write the log files and temporary files to the log subdirectory of the admin directory
  ($COMMON_TOP/admin/log) and the output files to the out subdirectory of the admin


                              na se
  directory ($COMMON_TOP/admin/out).


                            er U
  Release 12 introduces some significant changes to the locations in which the various types of
  Java files are stored. Rapid Install installs all Oracle Applications class files in the

                         nt
  $COMMON_TOP/java/classes directory, pointed to by the $JAVA_TOP environment

                       I
  variable. Zip and jar files are installed in the $COMMON_TOP/lib directory, pointed to by the

            le
  $AF_JLIB environment variable (introduced with Release 12). The top-level Java directory,
  $COMMON_TOP/java, is pointed to by the $JAVA_BASE environment variable.
          c
  ra
  The OA_HTML environment variable points to the $COMMON_TOP/webapps/oacore/html
  subdirectory. The Oracle Applications HTML-based sign-on screen and Oracle HTML-based

O Applications HTML files are installed here.

                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 33
 Java Files




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Java Files
                                         le
                                      ac
  To facilitate access by the various products that utilize them, Oracle Applications Java files are
  installed in the $COMMON_TOP/java/classes directory ($JAVA_TOP). Rapid Install installs
                                    r
  the Java files in the form of Java Archive (JAR) files. Java zip files are stored in the
                                   O ly
  COMMON_TOP/java/lib ($AF_JLIB)directory.


                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 34
 Applications Technology Stack Directory




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Applications Technology Stack Directory
                                         le
                                      ac
  To enable Applications to take advantage of the latest Oracle technologies, Release 12 utilizes
  two ORACLE_HOMEs under the Applications technology stack directory (for example,
  /u01/oracle/VIS/apps/tech_st).    r
                                   O ly
  Features of this strategy include:


                                l & On
    • The Application Server 10.1.2 ORACLE_HOME replaces the 8.0.6 ORACLE_HOME
      provided by Oracle9i Application Server 1.0.2.2.2 in Release 11i.

                              na se
    • The Application Server 10.1.3 ORACLE_HOME replaces the 8.1.7-based


                            er U
      ORACLE_HOME provided by Oracle9i Application Server 1.0.2.2.2 in Release 11i


                         nt
    • All major services are started out of the 10.1.3 ORACLE_HOME.

                       I
    • The Applications modules (packaged in the file formsapp.ear) are deployed into the OC4J-
      Forms instance running out of the 10.1.3 ORACLE_HOME, while the frmweb executable

            le
      is invoked out of the 10.1.2 ORACLE_HOME.
          c
    • Oracle Containers for Java (OC4J), the successor to JServ, is included in Oracle


O ra  Application Server 10g 10.1.3.



                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 35
 Database Directories




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
 Database Directories
                                         le
                                      ac
  The database server has its own directory structure and ORACLE_HOME.

                                    r
  The 10.2.0 Oracle Home (Applications database home) is located under the db/tech_st
  directory: for example, /u01/oracle/VIS/db/tech_st/10.2.0. It contains the files needed to run
                                   O ly
  and maintain the Oracle Applications database. For example, the database and listener control


                                l & On
  scripts are located in the $ORACLE_HOME/appsutil/scripts/<CONTEXT_NAME> directory.
  (Not all directories are shown on the slide.)


                              na se
  The directory with the Applications data files and control files is also located under the db


                            er U
  directory: for example, /u01/oracle/VIS/db/apps_st/data



                       I nt
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 36
 Module Summary




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                         le
                                    r ac
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 37
 Module Discussion




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                         le
                                    r ac
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 38
 Module Practice




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                         le
                                    r ac
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 39
 Practice - Navigating the File System
 Overview
 In this practice, you navigate throughout the file system created by Rapid Install to review the
 file system configuration of Oracle Applications Release 12.

 Tasks
 1. Log in as the applmgr user.

 2. Run the consolidated Applications environment file.

 3. List the directories and files in this directory (APPL_TOP).

 4. Review the directory structure for a product. All Oracle Applications products share virtually
    the same directory structure.

 5. Navigate to COMMON_TOP.

 6. Review the contents of COMMON_TOP.

 7. Navigate to INST_TOP.
                                                                                                       m y
 8. Review the contents of INST_TOP.

                                                                                                   a de
 9. Navigate to JAVA_TOP and review the contents.

 10. Navigate to the tools ORACLE_HOME.
                                                                                                A c
                                         le
     This is the OracleAS ORACLE_HOME for the Oracle Developer products.



                                    r ac
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 40
 Solution - Navigating the File System
 1. Log in as the applmgr user.

 2. Run the consolidated Applications environment file.
    This file is located in the APPL_TOP and is called APPS<context name>.env.

      $ cd <Path to APPL_TOP>
      $ . APPS<context name>.env

 3. List the directories and files in this directory (APPL_TOP).
    Use the “ls” command. There is a <PROD>_TOP for each product available with Oracle
    Applications.

 4. Review the directory structure for a product.
    All Oracle Applications products share virtually the same directory structure. Go to the
    GL_TOP directory to review the directory structure for the GL product.

      $ cd $GL_TOP
      $ ls

 5. Navigate to COMMON_TOP.

      $ cd $COMMON_TOP
                                                                                                       m y
 6. Review the contents of COMMON_TOP.
                                                                                                   a de
      $ ls
                                                                                                A c
 7. Navigate to INST_TOP.
                                         le
     $ cd $INST_TOP
                                    r ac
                                   O ly
 8. Review the contents of $INST_TOP.


                                l & On
     $ ls


                              na se
     Can you see how the instance-specific files have been located here in Release 12?


                            er U
 9. Navigate to JAVA_TOP and review the contents.

                         nt
      $ cd $JAVA_TOP
                       I
               le
      $ ls

             c
 10. Navigate to the tools ORACLE_HOME.


O ra This is the OracleAS 10.1.2 ORACLE_HOME for the Oracle Developer products.

      $ cd $ORACLE_HOME

                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 41
 Practice - Locating and Examining the Applications Context File
 Overview
 In this practice, you examine the contents of the Applications context file.

 Tasks
 1. Log in as the applmgr user.

 2. Open the Applications context file and view the contents.
    This file is located in $INST_TOP/appl/admin.

 3. In the context file, find the value for the database port.

 4. In the context file, find the value for context name.

 5. Examine the format of the context file.




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                         le
                                    r ac
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 42
 Solution - Locating and Examining the Applications Context File
 1. Log in as the applmgr user.

 2. Open the Applications context file and view the contents.
    This file is located in INST_TOP/appl/admin and is called <context name>.xml.

     $ cd $APPL_TOP/appl/admin
     $ view <context_name>.xml

 3. In the context file, find the value for the database port.
    parameter = s_dbport

 4. In the context file, find the value for context name.
    parameter = s_context_name

 5. Examine the format of the context file. Note the heading that states the file must not be
    manually edited, because such edits will be lost when AutoConfig is next run.




                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                         le
                                    r ac
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 43
                                                                                                       m y
                                                                                                   a de
                                                                                                A c
                                         le
                                    r ac
                                   O ly
                                l & On
                              na se
                         nt er U
                       I
          c le
O ra
                                   Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications File System
                                                  Chapter 7 - Page 44
                                                          Oracle Applications Database
                                                          Chapter 8



                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                                Chapter 8 - Page 1
                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                                Chapter 8 - Page 2
 Oracle Applications Database




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                                Chapter 8 - Page 3
 Objectives




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                                Chapter 8 - Page 4
 Module Overview




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Overview
                                        le
                                     ac
  Within its multi-tier architecture, Oracle Applications stores business data in Oracle database
  tables. Additional database objects such as indexes and views are used when processing these
                                   r
  tables. Oracle Applications code modules, in the form of stored procedures, are also contained
  within the database.
                                  O ly
                               l & On
  This module discusses:
    • The database objects used by Oracle Applications

                             na se
    • Oracle Applications’ use of schemas to control access


                           er U
    • The APPS schema


                        nt
    • Oracle Applications product schemas

                      I
    • Multiple Organization Architecture


            le
    • Multiple Reporting Currencies

          c
    • Database tier server process scripts



O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                                Chapter 8 - Page 5
 Oracle Applications Database Objects




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Oracle Applications Database Objects
                                        le
                                     ac
  Oracle Applications stores data and some code in the Oracle database. Each Oracle
  Applications product has its own set of database objects, and may share these objects with
  other products.                  r
                                  O ly
  Database objects can be divided into the following categories:


                               l & On
    • Data objects - Used for storing and accessing business data. These objects include tables,
      indexes, sequences, and index-organized tables.

                             na se
    • Code objects - Used to process the data. These objects include triggers, PL/SQL


                           er U
      packages, Java stored procedures, synonyms, and views.


                        nt
    • Hybrid objects - Used to both store and process data. Materialized views are an example
      of hybrid objects.
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                                Chapter 8 - Page 6
 Multiple Languages in the Database




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Multiple Languages in the Database
                                        le
                                     ac
  Oracle Applications features that support multiple languages store translated data in translation
  tables. These tables are appended with “_TL”. For example, the FND_ APPLICATION_TL
                                   r
  table stores translated information about all the applications registered with Oracle Application
                                  O ly
  Object Library. Compare this with the FND_APPLICATION table, which stores base


                               l & On
  information about all the applications registered with Oracle Application Object Library.
  There are also views that are appended with “_VL” that use the LANGUAGE column of the


                             na se
  _TL tables and the user’s session language setting to retrieve data in the correct language.




                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                                Chapter 8 - Page 7
 Schemas




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Schemas
                                        le
                                     ac
  A schema is a named collection of database objects. The schema is the owner of the objects it
  contains, and controls access to them. A schema can allow another schema to use its objects.
                                   r
  by granting the second schema the appropriate level of access.
                                  O ly
  The concept of a database schema is directly tied to the concept of a database user. That is,


                               l & On
  there is a one-to-one relationship between schemas and users in an Oracle Applications
  database. The database user and the schema have the same name.


                             na se
  There are several important characteristics of schema usage by Oracle Applications:


                           er U
    • An Oracle Applications product’s database objects are divided between the product


                        nt
       schema and the APPS schema.
    • A product’s schema contains only its own data objects (tables, sequences, and indexes).
                      I
    • All code objects (triggers, views, packages, and synonyms) for all products reside in the

            le
       APPS schema.
          c
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                                Chapter 8 - Page 8
 Example Oracle Applications Product Schemas




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Oracle Applications Product Schemas
                                        le
                                     ac
  In general, each product has a corresponding schema that is used to store that product’s data
  objects. The default Oracle schema name and password for a product are usually the same as
  the product’s abbreviation.
  For example:
                                   r
                                  O ly
                               l & On
    • Oracle General Ledger data objects are stored in the GL schema.


                             na se
    • Oracle Receivables data objects are stored in the AR schema.




                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                                Chapter 8 - Page 9
 APPS Schema




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 APPS Schema
                                        le
                                     ac
  To achieve a high level of mutual integration, Oracle Applications products must to be able to
  access objects as required. For example, a package or view owned by one product may need to
                                   r
  access data or other packages or views owned by other products.
                                  O ly
  Maintaining individual access rights between all product schemas would be inefficient and


                               l & On
  inflexible. Instead, all code objects are kept in the central APPS schema, which facilitates
  access as follows:


                             na se
    • Each product’s schema grants full privileges to the APPS schema


                           er U
    • The APPS schema has synonyms to all base product tables and sequences


                        nt
    • Hence, APPS has universal access to Oracle Applications

                      I
  Runtime usage of Oracle Applications is through the APPS schema only. Users do not connect
  directly to product schemas such as INV.


          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 10
 Additional Schemas




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Additional Schemas
                                        le
                                     ac
  The data objects for some products are combined within a single schema. For example, data
  objects for the Human Resources products (Human Resources - PER, Payroll - PAY, and so
                                   r
  on) are stored under a dedicated HR schema, whereas data objects for the Applications
                                  O ly
  technology layer products (FND, AD, and so on) are all stored under the APPLSYS schema.


                               l & On
  There is also a public schema, APPLSYSPUB, which is used only during the signon process
  and has no data objects, only synonyms to APPS.


                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 11
 Schemas Used During Signon




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Schemas Used During Signon
                                        le
                                     ac
  When you sign on to Oracle Applications, you initially connect to the public schema,
  APPLSYSPUB. Once your user name and password have been verified, Oracle Applications
                                   r
  connects you to the APPS schema and allows you to choose a responsibility. You can then use
                                  O ly
  the Forms interface or HTML interface to access data that resides in a product schema.


                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 12
 Implementing Multiple Organizations




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Implementing Multiple Organizations
                                        le
                                     ac
   The Oracle Applications Multiple Organizations Architecture provides support for multiple
   organizations in a single installation of Oracle E-Business Suite. The Multiple Organizations
                                   r
   feature enables implementers to partition data by various types of organizational units, such as
                                  O ly
   operating units and inventory organizations.


                               l & On
   Database objects that utilize Multiple Organizations can easily be identified by their object
   name. Base tables which provide unsecured data access have a suffix of "_ALL“, whereas


                             na se
   synonyms for the same logical object, but without the suffix, provide secured data access. For


                           er U
   example, AP_INVOICES_ALL and AP_INVOICES are examples of a base table and secured
   synonym respectively.

                        nt
   Before Release 12, the Multiple Organizations feature had to be enabled explicitly, by running

                      I
   the AD Administration utility and choosing the 'Convert to Multi-Org' program. This converted

            le
   existing data, and (where applicable) replicated seed data.

          c
   By contrast, Multiple Organizations is enabled by default in a fresh install of Release 12. You


  ra
   only need to run the seed data replication program if you define new operating units from the
   Define Organization form in Oracle HRMS.

O  For further details, see Oracle Applications Multiple Organizations Implementation Guide.

                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 13
 Reporting Currencies




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Reporting Currencies
                                        le
                                     ac
  The Reporting Currencies feature permits an organization to report and maintain accounting
  records at the transaction level in more than one functional currency.
                                   r
  You do this by defining one or more reporting sets of books in addition to your primary set of
                                  O ly
  books. In your reporting sets of books you maintain records in a functional currency other than


                               l & On
  your primary functional currency.
  Your primary functional currency is the currency you use to record your business transactions

                             na se
  and accounting data within Oracle Applications. The primary functional currency is defined


                           er U
  within your primary set of books. A reporting functional currency is a functional currency as
  defined in a reporting set of books. You can use any defined functional currency to support
  financial reporting.

                      I nt
  Reporting Currencies can be used even if the Multiple Organization Architecture is not

            le
  implemented.

          c
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 14
 Database Features




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Database Performance Features
                                        le
                                     ac
  The Oracle database server documentation contains in-depth information on each of these
  features.
                                   r
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 15
 Database Features




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Database Performance Features
                                        le
                                     ac
  The Oracle database server documentation contains in-depth information on each of these
  features.
                                   r
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 16
 Monitoring Features – Automatic Workload Repository




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Automatic Workload Repository (AWR)
                                        le
                                     ac
  The Automatic Workload Repository is a repository of database performance statistics built in
  to the Oracle 10g Release 2 database. AWR automatically generates snapshots of performance
                                   r
  data at regular intervals (typically, once an hour) and collects the statistics for use in problem
                                  O ly
  detection and tuning. The gathered data can be displayed in both reports and views.


                               l & On
  You can access AWR through Oracle Enterprise Manager Database Control, managing
  snapshots or modifying settings in order to create baselines that capture typical performance


                             na se
  periods. The baselines can be used for comparisons with similar workload periods where


                           er U
  performance problems have been reported.



                      I nt
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 17
 Monitoring Features – Automatic Database Diagnostic Monitor




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                        le
 Automatic Database Diagnostic Monitor (ADDM)


                                     ac
  The Automatic Database Diagnostic Monitor is a tool that allows the Oracle database diagnose
  its own performance, and determine how problems can be resolved.
                                   r
  ADDM analyzes Automatic Workload Repository data on a regular basis, locating the root
                                  O ly
  causes of performance problems and providing recommendations for correcting them. Because


                               l & On
  AWR stores historical performance data, ADDM can be used to analyze performance issues
  after the event, saving time and resources in reproducing a problem (where this is even


                             na se
  possible).


                           er U
  Automatic database diagnostic monitoring is enabled by default, and its primary interface is
  Oracle Enterprise Manager Database Control.


                      I nt
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 18
 Monitoring Features – Active Session History




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Database Performance Features
                                        le
                                     ac
  Active Session History is a means by which a detailed history of database activity is captured
  and stored. Only active sessions are captured, so the amount of data recorded is directly related
                                   r
  to the work being performed. The V$ACTIVE_SESSION_HISTORY view records current
  sampled session activity.
                                  O ly
                               l & On
  Unlike the instance-level statistics gathered by AWR, ASH gathers data at the session level.
  You can run ASH reports to analyze transient performance problems with the database that


                             na se
  may only occur during specific times. For example, ASH can often be used to identify short-


                           er U
  duration problems (perhaps lasting only a few minutes) that would represent too small a
  proportion of an ADDM analysis period to be noticeable.


                      I nt
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 19
 Performance Features – Query Optimization




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Cost-Based Optimization
                                        le
                                     ac
  The Oracle optimizer evaluates many factors to calculate the most efficient way to execute a
  SQL statement. It is capable of using either a rule-based or cost-based approach for execution
                                   r
  of the statement. Rule-based optimization was used in earlier Applications releases, but since
                                  O ly
  the SQL used in Release 12 has been extensively tuned for cost-based optimization, Release 12


                               l & On
  (like Release 11i) requires the optimizer to use cost-based optimization (CBO).
  Using CBO, the optimizer considers the available access paths, factoring in statistical


                             na se
  information for the tables and indexes that the SQL statement will access. CBO also considers


                           er U
  hints, which are optimization suggestions placed in a comment block of an SQL statement.
  For some operations, such as batch processing, Release 12 uses CBO to achieve the most

                        nt
  efficient means of processing all rows that are accessed by the statement. For other operations,

                      I
  such as accessing forms or communication with the desktop client, Release 12 uses CBO to

            le
  achieve the best response time for processing the first rows that are accessed by the statement.

          c
  Several other Oracle database performance enhancements used in Release 12, such as


  ra
  partitioned tables, also require use of the cost-based optimizer.


O
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 20
 Performance Features – Database Resource Manager




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Database Resource Manager
                                        le
                                     ac
  The Database Resource Manager gives the system administrator extensive control over
  processing resources on the database server node. The administrator can distribute server CPU
                                   r
  based on business rules, ensuring that the highest priority activities always have sufficient CPU
                                  O ly
  resources. The administrator could, for example, guarantee Order Entry users 40% of CPU


                               l & On
  resources during business hours, regardless of the load or number of users in other groups on
  the system.


                             na se
  System administrators can also use the Database Resource Manager to limit the impact of any


                           er U
  inefficient ad hoc queries. For example, a limit of 5% of CPU resources could be placed on ad
  hoc queries against the database.


                      I nt
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 21
 Performance Features – Partitioned Tables




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Partitioned Tables
                                        le
                                     ac
  Partitioning helps support very large tables and indexes by dividing them into smaller, more
  manageable pieces called partitions. Once the desired partitions have been defined, SQL
                                   r
  statements can access them instead of the original tables or indexes.
                                  O ly
  Partitioning reduces access time, and partitions are especially useful in data warehouse


                               l & On
  applications, which often store and analyze large amounts of historical data. For example,
  operations that involve copying or deleting data are improved by use of partitioned tables.


                             na se
  Partitioning of standard Applications tables in Oracle Applications Release 12 is fully


                           er U
  supported. Most Applications tables do not have a natural partitioning key that would apply to
  all installations, because of differences in data distribution and access paths in different

                        nt
  implementations. Tables should therefore be partitioned in a logical manner, to meet specific

                      I
  requirements. For example, period_name and set_of_books_id are likely candidates for

            le
  partitioning the GL_BALANCES table. Operations such as data loads, index creation and
  rebuilding, and backup/recovery are much faster tat the partition level than on the entire table.
          c
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 22
 Performance Features – Temporary Tables




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Temporary Tables
                                        le
                                     ac
  Characteristics of temporary tables include:

                                   r
   • Data in a temporary table is private to each user’s session.

                                  O ly
   • Each session can only see and modify its own data.
   • Locks are not acquired on the temporary table because each session has its own private
      data.
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 23
 Performance Features – Locally Managed Tablespaces




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Locally Managed Tablespaces
                                        le
                                     ac
  In the traditional model, each Oracle Applications product had its own table and index
  tablespaces. For optimum performance, these are created as locally managed tablespaces.
                                   r
  Oracle Applications tablespaces have a standard naming convention, in which ‘D’ (for data) or
                                  O ly
  ‘X’ (for index) is added to the product’s short name or Oracle schema name. For example, the


                               l & On
  tablespaces APD and APX are the tablespaces for Oracle Payables tables and indexes,
  respectively. The new tablespace model (OATM) also uses locally managed tablespaces.


                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 24
 Performance Features – Oracle Applications Tablespace Model




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Oracle Applications Tablespace Model
                                        le
                                     ac
  In the traditional model, each Oracle Applications product had its own table and index
  tablespaces. With an increasing number of products available, this would mean a need for
                                   r
  several hundred product tablespaces.
                                  O ly
  The Oracle Applications Tablespace Model (OATM) accommodates the schema objects for all


                               l & On
  products in a much smaller number of locally managed tablespaces. OATM groups Oracle
  Applications schema objects based on characteristics such as size, lifespan, and the type of data


                             na se
  they contain. For example, tables that contain seed data are allocated to a different tablespace


                           er U
  from tables that contain transactional data.



                      I nt
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 25
 Scalability Features – Oracle Real Application Clusters




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                        le
 Oracle Real Application Clusters (Oracle RAC)


                                     ac
  A large processing task, divided into subtasks and distributed among multiple nodes of a
  cluster of computers, is completed more quickly and efficiently than if the entire task was
                                   r
  processed on one node. As nodes or disks are added to a cluster, Oracle RAC utilizes these
                                  O ly
  resources beyond their limits as individual components, maximizing their usefulness in


                               l & On
  catering for larger workloads and growing user populations.
  In Oracle RAC environments, all active instances can concurrently execute transactions against


                             na se
  a shared database. Oracle RAC coordinates each instance’s access to the shared data, providing


                           er U
  data consistency and data integrity. From a developer’s point of view, RAC enables
  applications to be scaled to meet increasing demand, without the need to modify the

                        nt
  application code.

                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 26
 Scalability Features – Oracle Real Application Clusters




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                        le
 Oracle Real Application Clusters (Oracle RAC)


                                     ac
  All Oracle Applications products can be successfully deployed against an Oracle RAC-enabled
  database.
                                   r
  Using Parallel Concurrent Processing, concurrent managers on separate application tier
                                  O ly
  machines can be configured to direct requests to different database servers in an Oracle RAC


                               l & On
  cluster.



                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 27
 Business Intelligence Features – Materialized Views




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Materialized Views
                                        le
                                     ac
  Materialized views are schema objects that can be used to summarize, precompute, replicate,
  and distribute data. When used to precompute and store aggregated data such as sums and
                                   r
  averages, they can greatly increase the speed of queries on very large databases. Materialized
                                  O ly
  views can therefore improve performance of Oracle Applications products, such as Daily


                               l & On
  Business Intelligence, that perform many queries on summary data. They are also potentially
  very useful in data warehouse environments.


                             na se
  Cost-based optimization, discussed earlier in this module, use materialized views to improve


                           er U
  query performance, by automatically recognizing when one can be used to satisfy a request. In
  such a case, the optimizer transparently rewrites the request to use the materialized view

                        nt
  instead of the underlying tables or views.

                      I
  In distributed environments, materialized views can be used to replicate data at remote sites,

            le
  providing local access to data that would otherwise have to be accessed from the main site via
  a network link.
          c
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 28
 Database Tier Server Process Scripts




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Database Tier Server Process Scripts
                                        le
                                     ac
  The key directory on the database tier is
  <RDBMS_ORACLE_HOME>/appsutil/scripts/<CONTEXT_NAME>. This directory contains
                                   r
  control scripts to start and stop the database and database listener processes and to run
  AutoConfig.
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 29
 Database Tier Server Process Scripts




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Database Tier Server Process Scripts
                                        le
                                     ac
  UNIX uses shell scripts (.sh) to control database server process startup and shutdown. On
  Windows, command files (.cmd) are used.
                                   r
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 30
 Database Tier Server Process Scripts




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
 Database Tier Server Process Scripts
                                        le
                                     ac
  On Windows, you can also start up or shut down database server processes as follows:

                                   r
    1. Go to Start > Administrative Tools > Services

                                  O ly
    2. Select a service from the Services window
    3. Click Start or Stop, as required

                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 31
 Module Summary




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 32
 Module Discussion




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 33
 Module Practice




                                                                                                    m y
                                                                                                a de
                                                                                             A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                               Chapter 8 - Page 34
 Practice - Starting and Stopping the Database
 Overview
 When Rapid Install installs Oracle Applications, it configures and starts the database. In this
 practice, you start and stop the database using the scripts created by Rapid Install.

 Tasks
 1. Log in as oracle, the owner of the database file system (Database Oracle home and database
    files). In most classroom systems the default database user is usually the same as the default
    Applications user, though on real systems these will typically be separate accounts, such as
    “oracle” and “applmgr” respectively.

 2. Run the database ORACLE_HOME environment file.

 3. Navigate to the database ORACLE_HOME/appsutil/scripts/<context name> directory.

 4. List the files in this directory.

 5. Stop the database using the addbctl.sh script.
    The file header for each script contains instructions on how to run the script.

                                                                                                     m y
                                                                                                   de
 6. Restart the database.


                                                                                                 a
 7. Examine the format of the Net Services listener process script and, if time permits, use it to
    stop and start the listener.
                                                                                                c
                                                                                              A
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                 Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                                Chapter 8 - Page 35
 Solution - Starting and Stopping the Database
 1. Log in as oracle, the owner of the database file system (Database Oracle home and database
    files). In most classroom systems the default database user is usually the same as the default
    Applications user, though on real systems these will typically be separate accounts, such as
    “oracle” and “applmgr” respectively.

 2. Run the database ORACLE_HOME environment file.
    This file is located in the database ORACLE_HOME, and is called <context name>.env.

 3. Navigate to the database ORACLE_HOME/appsutil/scripts/<context name> directory.

 4. List the files in this directory.
    Use the “ls” command to see the files in this directory. The addlnctl.sh script starts and stops
    the Net Services listener, and the addbctl.sh script starts and stops the database.

 5. Stop the database.
    The file header for each script contains instructions on how to run the script. Use the
    following command to stop the database:

      $ addbctl.sh stop normal

 6. Restart the database.
                                                                                                     m y
                                                                                                   de
    Use the following command to start the database:

      $ addbctl.sh start

                                                                                                ca
 7. Examine the format of the Net Services listener process script and, if time permits, use it to
    stop and start the listener. The listener name is usually the same as the SID.            A
                                        le
                                     ac
      $ addlnctl.sh stop <listener name>
      $ addlnctl.sh start <listener name>
                                   r
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                 Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Oracle Applications Database
                                                Chapter 8 - Page 36
                                                            Advanced Configuration
                                                            Options
                                                            Chapter 9

                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                  Chapter 9 - Page 1
                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                  Chapter 9 - Page 2
 Advanced Configuration Options




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                  Chapter 9 - Page 3
 Objectives




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                  Chapter 9 - Page 4
 Module Overview




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Overview
                                        le
                                     ac
  Once the basic install decisions have been made, there are several important areas where
  additional configuration may be needed for a particular site, to implement required features and
                                   r
  ensure the desired performance is obtained.
  This module discusses:          O ly
                               l & On
    • Shared Application Tier File System


                             na se
    • Load Balancing Options
    • Network Features



                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                  Chapter 9 - Page 5
 Shared Application Tier File System - Introduction




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Shared Application Tier File System
                                        le
                                     ac
  Oracle Applications Release 12 extends and simplifies the existing capabilities of sharing the
  $APPL_TOP and application tier file system.
                                   r
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                  Chapter 9 - Page 6
 Shared Application Tier File System – Not In Use




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Shared Application Tier File System
                                        le
                                     ac
  A traditional multi-node application tier installation requires the Applications file system to be
  installed on each application tier node.
                                   r
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                  Chapter 9 - Page 7
 Shared Application Tier File System – In Use




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Shared Application Tier File System
                                        le
                                     ac
  A shared application tier file system means that there is a single (the same) application tier file
  system capable of being accessed simultaneously by two or more machines. In a shared
                                   r
  application tier file system environment, each node has its own environment file
                                  O ly
  (APPS<CONTEXT_NAME>.env) and Applications context file (<CONTEXT_NAME>.xml).


                               l & On
  A shared application tier file system environment requires the relevant shared disk volume to
  be attached to a mount point of the same name on all participating machines, so the path to the


                             na se
  application tier file system will have the same value on all machines.




                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                  Chapter 9 - Page 8
 Shared Application Tier File System – Features




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Shared Application Tier File System
                                        le
                                     ac
  A single application tier file system can be used for multiple node types in an application tier.
  For sites that have an application tier file system already installed and performing all the
                                   r
  required functions, that particular application tier file system can be shared immediately: it is
                                  O ly
  not necessary to start from scratch and create a single application tier file system that can


                               l & On
  provide services for all the application tier nodes.
  Sharing technologies are available from a number of vendors, and offer various levels of


                             na se
  sophistication. Specific solutions are not certified against Oracle Applications. The only


                           er U
  essential requirement is for the application tier file system to be accessible from all nodes.
  The Release 12 Rapid Install offers a multi-node installation with a shared application tier file
  system as an option.

                      I nt
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                  Chapter 9 - Page 9
 Shared Application Tier File System – Benefits




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Shared Application Tier File System
                                        le
                                     ac
  There are several benefits to using a shared application tier file system.

                                   r
   • Extensible System Architecture - The ease with which machines can be added to an
      existing system facilitates the deployment of a large number of application tier machines,
                                  O ly
      to help maximize system availability and cater for additional usage requirements.


                               l & On
   • Reduced Disk Space Requirements - Overall disk space requirements are greatly
      reduced, as there is only a single copy of the relevant Applications code.

                             na se
   • Simpler Administration - Since there is only one physical application tier file system file


                           er U
      system, administrative tasks such as patch application need only be carried out once, on


                        nt
      any node, and take effect immediately on all nodes.
   • Utilization of Distributed AD - Distributed AD is a means of improving the efficiency of
                      I
      patch application and thereby reducing downtime. Distributed AD requires a shared

            le
      application tier file system.

          c
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 10
 Shared Application Tier File System - Availability




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Shared Application Tier File System
                                        le
                                     ac
  Since there is only one physical application tier file system file system, an Applications patch
  only needs to be applied once, and its effects are seen immediately on all the nodes. This will
                                   r
  help minimize the duration of planned maintenance outages, and reduce the scope for errors.
                                  O ly
  Sharing an application tier file system makes it easier to add nodes to an existing installation,


                               l & On
  to cater for additional users, provide greater resilience, and maximize availability. This is
  particularly cost-effective with inexpensive Linux nodes.


                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 11
 Load Balancing – Introduction




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Load Balancing
                                        le
                                     ac
  Oracle Applications provides numerous options for building and tailoring an installation to
  meet specific business and technical requirements. At a hardware level, this includes the
                                   r
  capability to utilize additional machines to distribute the various Applications technology
  layers according to:
                                  O ly
                               l & On
    • Physical topology
    • Required performance
    • Desired expenditure
                             na se
                           er U
  Other possible factors include:


                        nt
    • Growth in user base

                      I
    • Fluctuations in demand


            le
    • Resilience in the event of hardware problems

          c
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 12
 Load Balancing – Strategic Effect




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Load Balancing
                                        le
                                     ac
  This section describes how to make the decisions needed to balance the load on various
  components or layers, which is of particular importance for two reasons:
                                   r
    • Load balancing can involve the entire infrastructure of an E-Business Suite installation,
                                  O ly
       with a change in one area potentially having significant effects elsewhere


                               l & On
    • Making informed decisions about load balancing can often enable a higher level of
       performance to be obtained without expenditure on additional hardware

                             na se
  The emphasis here is on describing load balancing strategies and their key features, to allow an


                           er U
  informed decision to be made regarding the applicability and usefulness of a particular area of


                        nt
  load balancing in achieving the desired technical and business requirements.

                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 13
 Load Balancing – Areas




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Load Balancing
                                        le
                                     ac
  Principal load balancing areas include:
    • Domain Name Server
    • HTTP Server
    • Concurrent Processing Layer
                                   r
                                  O ly
    • Database Layer
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 14
 Load Balancing – Session Persistence




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Load Balancing
                                        le
                                     ac
  The main categories of load balancer are:

                                   r
  Session Persistent Load Balancers - After a client’s HTTP connection is established with a
  particular server, subsequent HTTP requests from that client are directed to the same server,
                                  O ly
  for the duration of the session. This persistency is also referred to as stickiness.


                               l & On
  Non-Session Persistent Load Balancers - These load balancers use a round-robin strategy for
  balancing incoming HTTP requests, and do not maintain session persistent client connections.

                             na se
  After a client’s initial HTTP connection is directed to a given server, subsequent HTTP


                           er U
  requests from that client will be not necessarily be directed to the same server.



                      I nt
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 15
 Load Balancing – SSL Accelerators




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Load Balancing
                                        le
                                     ac
  Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) Accelerators - Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) accelerators can be
  used to reduce the SSL traffic and workload of the Web servers.
                                   r
  Usually, an SSL accelerator is the target for HTTPS browser requests, and thus the target for
                                  O ly
  all client communication. It is responsible for converting HTTPS SSL requests to non-SSL


                               l & On
  HTTP requests, directing the subsequent request to the HTTP server (running in non-SSL
  mode). Before sending the response back to the client browser, the SSL accelerator converts


                             na se
  the non-SSL requests back to SSL requests, in a reverse of the initial process.




                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 16
 Load Balancing – Specific Options




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Load Balancing
                                        le
                                     ac
  Several different types of load balancing can be employed with Oracle E-Business Suite. They
  range from the relatively simple to the more sophisticated, and should be chosen to integrate
                                   r
  with the specific needs and existing infrastructure of a site.
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 17
 Load Balancing – DNS Layer




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Load Balancing
                                        le
                                     ac
  Domain Name Server (DNS) Layer Load Balancing distributes end-user requests across
  multiple server nodes, based on dynamic assignments of IP addresses to a fully qualified
  domain name.                     r
                                  O ly
  The diagram shows an example of a configuration that uses DNS layer load balancing.


                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 18
 Load Balancing – HTTP Layer




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 HTTP Layer Load Balancing
                                        le
                                     ac
  This type of load balancing can be used if you have a hardware load balancer that accepts
  HTTP communication and forwards it to a group of server nodes, sometimes referred to as a
  farm.                            r
                                  O ly
  The diagram shows an example of a configuration where an HTTP load balancer distributes the


                               l & On
  load across a farm consisting of two Web server nodes.



                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 19
 Load Balancing – Concurrent Processing Layer




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                        le
 Load Balancing – Concurrent Processing Layer


                                     ac
  Parallel Concurrent Processing (PCP) allows concurrent processing activities to be distributed
  across multiple nodes in an Oracle Real Application Clusters (Oracle RAC) environment or
                                   r
  similar cluster system. By distributing concurrent processing in this way, hardware resources
                                  O ly
  can be fully utilized, maximizing throughput and providing resilience to node failure, while


                               l & On
  retaining a central point of control.
  Parallel Concurrent Processing is enabled by default, so PCP is always available for use in


                             na se
  environments where one or more concurrent processing nodes exist.


                           er U
  Note: PCP does not require an Oracle RAC environment. Equally, you do not have to use PCP
  in an Oracle RAC environment, although it typically makes sense to do so.


                      I nt
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 20
 Load Balancing – Database Layer




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Load Balancing – Database Layer
                                        le
                                     ac
  Oracle Real Application Clusters (Oracle RAC) harnesses the processing power of multiple
  interconnected computers. In Oracle RAC environments, all active instances can concurrently
                                   r
  execute transactions against a shared database. Oracle RAC coordinates each instance's access
                                  O ly
  to the shared data, to provide data consistency and data integrity. From a developer's point of


                               l & On
  view, Oracle RAC enables applications to be scaled to meet increasing data processing
  demands, without the need to change the application code.


                             na se
  All E-Business Suite modules can be successfully deployed against a Oracle RAC-enabled


                           er U
  database. Parallel Concurrent Processing (see previous slide) can be used to configure
  concurrent managers on separate application tier machines to direct requests to different

                        nt
  database servers in an Oracle RAC cluster.

                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 21
 Network Features – Introduction




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Network Features
                                        le
                                     ac
  This discussion will pre-suppose the subject is a large, worldwide organization that uses a "hub
  and spoke“ network topology, with high-capacity links to regional hubs, and medium-capacity
                                   r
  connections from the regional hubs to local offices.
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 22
 Network Features – Strategies




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Network Architecture
                                        le
                                     ac
  A large, worldwide organization will typically benefit from the use of a “hub and spoke”
  network topology, with high-capacity links to regional hubs, and medium-capacity connections
                                   r
  from the regional hubs to local offices. The locations of the regional hubs should be based on
                                  O ly
  organizational need, carrier availability, pricing, and network latency.


                               l & On
  The routes and hops should be as short and efficient as practicable.
  Network design should be based around the needs of the majority of users; satellite users, for

                             na se
  example, will normally be a small minority.



                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 23
 Network Features – Latency




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Network Latency
                                        le
                                     ac
  Latency is the time for a packet to travel from its source to its destination, and is a key
  determinant of network efficiency. In general, Oracle Applications works very well with
                                   r
  average latencies up to 300ms, and is usually found to give acceptable performance with
  latencies up to 500ms.
                                  O ly
                               l & On
  Note that periods when forms are being loaded (for example, on startup) may be an issue in
  cases where latency is marginal. A consequence of this is that the newer HTML-based


                             na se
  applications (which do not use Forms) may give better performance than the traditional Forms-


                           er U
  based applications.



                      I nt
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 24
 Network Features – Satellite Links




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Satellite Links
                                        le
                                     ac
  Satellite links can be used with the Oracle Applications. They are considered to be just another
  network type, and may be the only choice for users in remote locations. In general, however,
                                   r
  they should be employed only where use of terrestrial services is not feasible.
                                  O ly
  If satellite links are to be used, the network stack should be examined and tuned by a network


                               l & On
  specialist, to ensure device timeout settings, for example, are configured optimally. The goal is
  to achieve reliable operation, while maintaining an acceptable response time.


                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 25
 Network Features – Wireless LANs




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Wireless LANs
                                        le
                                     ac
  Wireless technology is becoming of increasing interest and use to many organizations.
  However, its deployment must be planned carefully. As well as the security aspects of wireless
                                   r
  use, there are several technical considerations. For the Oracle Applications, the most important
                                  O ly
  issue is the stability of the connection. It is not uncommon to experience dropouts (momentary


                               l & On
  loss of service) while using a wireless LAN. These may occur as a result of not having the
  latest firmware revision, or interference from devices that use a similar wavelength, such as


                             na se
  cordless phones.


                           er U
  Use of the Forms Listener Servlet architecture (the default in Release 12) may be of benefit in
  a wireless LAN environment, as it is designed to attempt reconnection (via a configuration

                        nt
  parameter) in the event of a network interruption.

                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 26
 Network Features – Wireless LANs




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
 Wireless LANs
                                        le
                                     ac
  As far as supportability of wireless LANs goes, they are simply considered to be another
  network topology, and as such are neither supported nor unsupported. Hence it is feasible to
                                   r
  run Oracle Applications client PCs over a wireless LAN. However, in the event of problems, it
                                  O ly
  would be desirable to be able to determine whether the problem also occurs via a normal


                               l & On
  network link, that is, whether the cause lies in Oracle Applications or the network.



                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 27
 Module Summary




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 28
 Module Discussion




                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 29
                                                                                                      m y
                                                                                                  a de
                                                                                               A c
                                        le
                                   r ac
                                  O ly
                               l & On
                             na se
                        nt er U
                      I
          c le
O ra
                                  Copyright © Oracle Corporation, 2007. All rights reserved.

 Advanced Configuration Options
                                                 Chapter 9 - Page 30

				
DOCUMENT INFO
Shared By:
Stats:
views:287
posted:8/22/2012
language:Latin
pages:406
Description: Oracle Application R12 Study guides. Covers full Sylabus for R12 certifications
rajiv saghal rajiv saghal http://
About